Home
        ONKYO TX-NR717 AV receiver
         Contents
1.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Default 62503 mio TV 02802 Toshiba 01509 Samsung 01877  Zone 2 62506 Motorola 01376  00858  01562  UPC 01582 Scientific Atlanta 01877  01982  Zone 3 62507 01982  01998  02378 Verizon 02378 Shaw 01376  Moxi 02187 Videotron 01877 Suddenlink 01376  01877  Cable Set Top Box NEC 01496 Virgin Media 01068  01060 Thomson 01582  ADB 02254  02769 Neuf TV 03107 Visiopass 00817 Time Warner 01376  01877  02187  Aon 02769 Noos 00817 VTR 01376 UPC 01582  Arris 02187 NTL 01068  01060 WideOpenWest 01877 Videotron 01877  AT amp T 00858 Numericable 02767 Ziggo 00660  01666  02015  VTR 01376  Bright House 01376  01877 Ono 01068  01562 02142  02447  02774 WideOpenWest 01877  BT Vision 02294 Optus 01060 Ziggo 02142  Cable  amp  Wireless 01068 Orange 00817 Cable PVR Combination  Cable One 01376  01877 Pace 01376  01877  01068  Arris 02187 IPTV  Cablecom 01582 01060  01982 Bright House 01376  01877 ADB 02254  02769  Cablevision 01376  01877 Panasonic 01488  01982 Cable One 01376  01877 Aon 02769  Charter 01376  01877  02187 Philips 00817  01582  02294  Cablevision 01376  01877 AT amp T 00858  i   2767  Cisco 01877  00858  01982    PER Charter 01376  01877  02
2.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  IPTV PVR Combination CD CD MD  AT amp T 00858 Goldmund 70157 Restek 70157 Yamaha 70490  BT Vision 02294 Grundig 70157 Revox 70157  Cisco 00858  02345  02378 Harman Kardon 70157 Rotel 70157 Cassette Deck  Kreatel 01385 Hitachi 70032 SAE 70157 Aiwa 40029  Motorola 00858  02378 Integra 71817  70101 Sansui 70157 Arcam 40076  Neuf TV 03107 JVC 70072 SAST 70157 Audiolab 40029  Philips 02294 Kenwood 70626  70157  70036 Siemens 70157 Carver 40029  Scientific Atlanta 00858 Krell 70157 Silsonic 70036 Denon 40076  SFR 03107 Linn 70157 Simaudio 70157 Grundig 40029  Verizon 02378 Loewe 70157 Sonic Frontiers 70157 Harman Kardon 40029  Magnavox 70157 Sony 70490  70000 Inkel 40070  CD Marantz 70626  70029  70157 Sylvania 70157 JVC 40244  Advantage 70032 Matsui 70157 TAG McLaren 70157 Kenwood 40070  AH  70157 MCS 70029 Tandy 70032 Magnavox 40029  Aiwa 70157 Memorex 70032 Technics 70029  70303 Marantz 40029  Arcam 70157 Meridian 70157 Thorens 70157 Myryad 40029  Atoll Electronique 70157 Micromega 70157 Thule Audio 70157 Onkyo 42157  Audio Research 70157 Miro 70000 Traxdata 70626 Optimus 40027  Audiolab 70157 Mission 70157 Universum 70157 Philips 40029  Audiomeca 70157 Myryad 70157 Victor 70072 Pioneer 40027  Audioton 70157 NAD 70000  70721 Wards 70000  70032  70157 Polk Au
3.                                                                                                                                                                                                      DVD DVD DVD Blu ray Disc  Radionette 30741 Sylvania 30630  30675 Yamaha 30490  30539  30646  Sony 31516  32180  Radiotone 30713 Symphonic 30675 30817  31354  32298  Sylvania 30675  ymp y  RCA 30522  30571  32213  Tamashi 31394 322059 Toshiba 32551  32705  33157  32587 Tandberg 30713        te Vido 32563  REC 30490 Targa 30741   Yamaha 32298  32299  Red 3213 TU TT Blu ray Disc         Pi  Redstar 31394 TCL 32587 Ambiance a DVD R  Roadstar 30713 TCM 30741 00   an Accurian 30675  Rotel 30623 Teac 30571  30741  30675  Cambridge Audio 22203 Aristona 30646  Salora 30741 31394 Deron 22238  221R Denon 30490  Samsung 30490  30573  30199  Technica 30713 Em 33052 Emerson 30675  30820  31635  32069           30490 Foehn  amp  Hirsch 33052 Funai 30675  32329 32489  33195 Techwood 30713        xD Go Video 30741  Sanyo 30713 Teletech 30713 Harman Kardon 33228 GPX 30741  Schneider 30539  30646  30713 Theta Digital 30571 Insignia 30675  32428  32596 Hitachi 31664  Schoentech 30713   Integra 32147  32900  32910   Scott ET                30522 33100  33101  33500  Humax 30646  z a  Toshiba 30503  31639  32277  33501 Irradio 30646    sun 32551  32705  33157 we TT JVC 31597  emp Transonic 31394 Ins 33052 LG 30741  Sharp 30630  30675  30713  TVE 30713  32250  32474  32652  Lexicon 32545 Loewe IOTH  32869
4.                   Connecting Your                                                          About AV                        retomber  Connecting Components with HDMI     Connecting Your Components               Connecting Onkyo RI Components     Connecting the Antennas                       ss  Connecting the Power                                                      Turning On  amp  Basic Operations    Turning On Off the AV                                                  20  Tuning Di  20  Turning Off          Initial Setup  een  Selecting the Language  for the Onscreen Setup Menus                                21  Audyssey 2EQ  Auto                                                   21       Source COMEN                 22  Remote Mode Sloan 22  Network COMEN ces een 22  Terminating the Initial Setup                                       22    PlaybB  ck eS 23  Playing the Connected Component                            23  Controlling Contents of USB or Network Devices     24  Understanding Icons on the Display  Playing an iPod iPhone via                                        Playing a USB Device  ctr re pb tee  Listening to vTuner Internet Radio    sa  Registering Other Internet Radio                                 Changing the Icon Layout   on the Network Service                                            Playing Music Files on a Server      Remote                                      Playing Music Files on a Shared Folder                     30  Listening to AM FM Radi
5.                  Fl                 PURE AUDIO MOVIE TV  MUSIC  GAME  THX    MOVIE TV button   This button selects the listening modes intended for use  with movies and TV    MUSIC button   This button selects the listening modes intended for use  with music    GAME button   This button selects the listening modes intended for use  with video games    THX button   This button selects the THX listening modes    PURE AUDIO button and indicator   This button selects the Pure Audio listening mode    When this mode is selected  the AV receiver   s display and  analog video circuitry are turned off  Only video signals  input through HDMI input can be output from the HDMI  output  The indicator lights when this mode is selected   Pressing this button again will select the previous listening  mode       The Dolby Digital and DTS listening modes can only be  selected if your Blu ray Disc DVD player is connected to  the AV receiver with a digital audio connection  coaxial   optical  or HDMI       The listening modes you can select depends on the format    of the input signal  To check the format  see    Displaying  Source Information      gt  page 46       While a pair of headphones is connected  you can select the  following listening modes  Pure Audio  Mono  Direct  and  Stereo           En 38 Y    Turning On 8 Basic Operations  About Listening Modes    The AV receiver   s listening modes can transform your  listening room into a movie theater or concert hall  with  high fidelity and
6.               Note      With this setup  the volume of Zone 2 3 is controlled by the AV  receiver     A En 70 Y    Advanced Operations      When Powered Zone 2 is used  playback in the main room is  reduced to 5 1 channels      When Powered Zone 3 is used  playback in the main room is  reduced to 3 1 channels     Connecting the Zone Speakers to an  Additional Amplifier    This setup allows 7 1 channel playback in your main  listening room and 2 channel stereo playback in Zone 2 3     OG    AV receiver       Main room             O                                                                  o   O ello                                                20     2       Receiver  MES  Q integrated amp Q                      Zone 3       Receiver     Cj integrated amp Q    5                O                                  Note      The volume of Zone 2 3 must be set on the Zone 2 3 amplifier     Zone 2 12V Trigger    When Zone 2 is turned on  the output from the ZONE 2  12V TRIGGER OUT jack goes high   12 V and max  150  mA for Zone 2   Connecting this jack to a 12 volt trigger  input on a component in Zone 2 will make that component  turn on or off as the AV receiver turns on or off the Zone 2     Controlling Multi Zone Components    Bi Operating on the AV receiver    Input selector buttons  ZONE2 ZONE 3 MASTER VOLUME                                                                   OON STANDBY  Tip    The Whole House Mode function shares the input source of main  room with Mul
7.          sterov                                           PURE AUDIO    AUX INPUT         om    69 USB port  17      SETUP MIC jack  36     HYBRID STANDBY indicator  52       RT PTY TP button  European  Australian and  Asian models   33     Safety Information and Introduction    Display                                           For detailed information  see the pages in parentheses   9 Input indicators  91     Speaker channel indicators HDMI indicator  67        Z2  Zone 2  indicator  71  DIGITAL indicator   8  Z3  Zone 3  indicator  71  ANALOG indicator    Listening mode and format indicators  38  Bi AMP indicator     M Opt indicator  50    Audyssey indicator  35  60             and cursor indicators  25  Dynamic EQ indicator  60   0  NET indicator  27 to 29  31  69  Dynamic Vol indicator  61   Tuning indicators  2 Headphone indicator  47   RDS indicator  excluding North American and  9 Message area  Taiwanese models   33  MUTING indicator  47   AUTO indicator  32    Volume level  TUNED indicator  32  USB indicator  25  26   FM STEREO indicator  32    SLEEP indicator  46        Eno Y nO     North American models     Safety Information and Introduction     European  Australian  Asian and Taiwanese models      8                                                                                                               RI REMOTE CONTROL jack   2 USB port    ETHERNET port      Composite video and analog audio jacks     BD DVD IN  CBL SAT IN  STB DVR IN  GAME  IN  PC IN  TV CD 
8.         Remote Control Codes    ES VE    1 ESS   MRAD  T REMOTE MODE GERR  FRENAN  fit  DISPLAY     Em     K4 3 158     REMOTE MODE  0 0 01   3 1 1 44    tegra Ph LMHS FEA  fill     Remote Mode        XO        Display CER      fall    VER     RECEIVER CHA    AIS De eH AN Be n AEREA              TV CHUL   MA RE       BR  RECEIVER          J        CAD    1125    5 205  AE REMOTE MODE       ERAS  RATEN FH eS   AL  352 2 0 0811    AGE REA IG EL  DS  Ih  ERREUR RTE REN               REMOTE MODE      8 0  12           05  SEK CD TENUES  CD An  AE AN            TV CD       CD  1         30 MOA          5 MANE RAT   REMOTE MODE          0 44H   EIER                        ESS  REMOTE MODE       0 TEL         2  BEM Ue  VER   EE AV      017 sz BAN FR   2              E      PEAS AIA AS ad BA PAS      HE TT TREO  XUI          PR 0  fH  FY PAH DY         AY ASE TIL o  EN 220 BI  BEREIT       BARA SHR     HEP EP RARE A  DOVE PREFACE  TH     RAS nl  AB CIE LEE      MENT fe S6 A ER HE HE AY         SR  FY RE AIAG air ITI DE DEL BUS NETT    e RAT EN 02205012                             S ER EL                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Remote Control Codes       Dedicated Onkyo Receiver    Cable Set Top Box    Cable Set Top Box    Cable PVR Combination           
9.        B Only the front speakers produce sound       When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected  41  only the front speakers and subwoofer produce  sound     In the Mono listening mode  only the front speakers 58  output sound if the    Output Speaker    setting is set  to    Left   Right        Check the Speaker Configuration  55    E Only the center speaker produces sound       If you use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie  Dolby Pro      Logic IIx Music  or Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game   listening mode with a mono source  such as an AM   radio station or mono TV program  the sound is  concentrated in the center speaker     In the Mono listening mode  only the center speaker 58  output sound if the    Output Speaker    setting is set  to    Center        Make sure the speakers are configured correctly  55    E The surround speakers produce no sound       When the T D  Theater Dimensional   Stereo or      Mono listening mode is selected  the surround  speakers produce no sound     Depending on the source and current listening mode  38  not much sound may be produced by the surround  speakers  Try selecting another listening mode     Make sure the speakers are configured correctly  55    E The center speaker produces no sound       When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected       the center speaker produces no sound    In the Mono listening mode  only the front speakers 58  output sound if the    Output Speaker    setting is set   to    Left   Right      Make sure the 
10.        Repeat One Track          Repeat Folder  USB Device        Repeat       Shuffle             Shuffle Album  iPod iPhone        Playing an iPod iPhone via USB    The on screen information appears only on a TV that  is connected to HDMI outputs     This section explains how to play music video files on the  iPod iPhone    Compatible iPod iPhone models   Made for    iPod touch  1st  2nd  3rd and 4th generation   iPod classic   iPod nano  2nd  3rd  4th  5th and 6th generation     iPhone 4S  iPhone 4  iPhone 3GS  iPhone 3G  iPhone    1 Press USB repeatedly to select the    USB Front      input   Tip    The same operation can be done by selecting    USB    in the    Home menu     2 Connect the USB cable that comes with the  iPod iPhone to the USB port on the front of the AV  receiver    While reading the contents of your iPod iPhone  the  message    Connecting       appears on the AV  receiver   s display   The USB indicator lights  It will flash if the AV  receiver cannot read the iPod iPhone   Tip    When connecting your iPod iPhone with a USB cable  we  recommend you use an official USB cable from Apple Inc     A En25 Y    3    5    Turning On  amp  Basic Operations    Press MODE repeatedly to switch to Extended   Mode  Music  or Extended Mode  Video     A list of your iPod iPhone model   s contents appears   Tip     If you want to operate using the iPod iPhone or the remote  controller  press MODE repeatedly to switch to Standard  mode      When you disconnect the iPod iP
11.       A list of media server appears  Wording may vary  slightly depending on the network location     On the    Media streaming options     select the AV  receiver and confirm that it is set to    Allow      Click            to close the dialog box    This completes the Windows Media Player 12  configuration     You can now play the music files in your Windows  Media Player 12 library     Tip    On the    Stream    menu  confirm that    Allow remote control  of my Player       is checked     Using Remote Playback    1  2    3    Turn on the AV receiver     Start Windows Media Player 12   To enable remote playback  you must first configure  Windows Media Player 12     On Windows Media Player 12  right click on a  music file   The right click menu appears   Tip    For selecting another media server  select the desired media  server from the    Other Libraries    menu on Windows Media  Player 12   Select the AV receiver in    Remote playback      The    Play to    window appears and playback on the  AV receiver starts  Operations during remote playback  can be made from the    Play to    window of Windows 7  on your personal computer   A playback screen will be displayed on the connected  TV     5 Adjusting the Volume   You can adjust the volume by adjusting the volume  bar in the    Remote playback    window  The default  maximum volume level is 82  0dB   If you wish to  change this  enter the value from the Web Setup in  your browser  Refer to step 3 of    Registering Other  
12.      It takes up to 60 minutes to complete the firmware update      The AV receiver will retain all your settings after the update is  finished     Before Starting      Set the    HDMI Control RIHD     setting to    Off       gt  page 67       Turn off the controller device connected via Ethernet  cable      Turn off Multi Zone if this function is present      Stop playback of contents from Internet Radio   iPod iPhone  USB or servers  etc      If there is any data in the USB device  remove it first     Update Procedure    1 Connect a USB device to your PC  If there is any  data in the USB device  remove it first     2 Download the firmware file from the Onkyo web  site  The file name is as follows   ONKA VR     rk Zip    Unzip the downloaded file  The following five files  are created    NKA VR     nr of    NKA  Re      of2   NKA  RH    of3   NKA           of4   ONKA V Ritt  memes ofi    3 Copy the extracted files to the USB device  Be  careful not to copy the zip file     O  O  O  O       4 Remove the USB device from your PC and connect  it to the USB port on the AV receiver     When the AV receiver has two USB ports  you can  use either one     5 Make sure the AV receiver and TV are turned on   If the AV receiver is in standby mode  press  OON STANDBY on the AV receiver to light up the  front display    6 Select the USB input source       Now Initializing       appears on the AV receiver   s  display and then the name of the USB device is    displayed  It takes 20 to 30 se
13.      Red  right  Zone 2 right  Zone 3 right                      Center Green  Surround left Blue  Surround right Gray  Surround back left Brown  Surround back right Tan       The supplied speaker cable labels are also color coded and  you should attach them to the positive     side of each  speaker cable in accordance with the table above  Then all  you need to do is to match the color of each label to the  corresponding speaker terminal        A rd              Speaker Connection Precautions       Read the following before connecting your speakers      You can connect speakers with an impedance of between  4 and 16 ohms  If the impedance of any of the connected  speakers is 4 ohms or more  but less than 6 ohms  be sure  to set the minimum speaker impedance to    4ohms        page 55   If you use speakers with a lower  impedance  and use the amplifier at high volume levels  for a long period of time  the built in protection circuit  may be activated      Disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet before  making any connections      Read the instructions supplied with your speakers      Pay close attention to speaker wiring polarity  In other  words  connect positive     terminals only to positive        terminals  and negative       terminals only to negative        terminals  If you get them the wrong way around  the  sound will be out of phase and will sound unnatural      Unnecessarily long  or very thin speaker cables may    affect the sound quality and should be avo
14.      direct sunshine or inverter type fluorescent lights   Relocate if necessary    If the AV receiver is installed in a rack or cabinet      with colored glass doors  the remote controller may   not work reliably when the doors are closed                Make sure you    ve selected the correct remote  controller mode    When using the remote controller to control other  manufacturers    AV components  some buttons may  not work as expected    Make sure you    ve entered the correct remote control  code    Make sure to set the same ID on both the AV receiver  and remote controller     Bi Can t control other components    11  77    76    69       If it   s an Onkyo component  make sure that the RI  cable and analog audio cable are connected properly   Connecting only an RI cable won t be enough   Make sure you ve selected the correct remote  controller mode    If you ve connected an cassette tape deck to the  TV CD IN jack  or an RI Dock to the TV CD IN or  GAME IN jacks  for the remote controller to work  properly  you must set the input display  appropriately    If you cannot operate it  you will need to enter the  appropriate remote control code    To control another manufacturer s component  point  the remote controller at that component    To control an Onkyo component that s connected via  RI  point the remote controller at the AV receiver   Be sure to enter the appropriate remote control code  first    To control an Onkyo component that s not connected  via RI  point th
15.     1    To select a preset  use PRESET  lt   gt  on the AV  receiver  or the remote controller s CH       Tip    You can also use the remote controller   s number buttons to  select a preset directly        Deleting Presets    1  2    Select the preset that you want to delete    See the previous section    While holding down MEMORY  press TUNING  MODE     The preset is deleted and its number disappears from  the AV receiver   s display     Using RDS  excluding North American and  Taiwanese models     RDS works only in areas where RDS broadcasts are  available     When tuned into an RDS station  the RDS indicator lights   When the station is broadcasting text information  the text  can be displayed        What is RDS    RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a method of  transmitting data in FM radio signals  It was developed by  the European Broadcasting Union  EBU  and is available  in most European countries  Many FM stations use it these  days  In addition to displaying text information  RDS can  also help you find radio stations by type  e g   news  sport   rock  etc       The AV receiver supports four types of RDS information   PS  Program Service    When tuned to an RDS station that   s broadcasting PS  information  the station   s name will be displayed  Pressing  DISPLAY will display the frequency for 3 seconds    RT  Radio Text    When tuned to an RDS station that   s broadcasting text  information  the text will be shown on the AV receiver   s  display as describe
16.     Before you change these settings  turn down the volume     E Speaker Impedance     4ohms   Select if the impedance of any speaker is 4 ohms or  more but less than 6      gt  6ohms   Select if the impedances of all speakers are between 6  and 16 ohms        E Speakers Type Front      Normal   Select this if you ve connected your front speakers  normally    gt  Bi Amp   Select this if you ve bi amped your front speakers     E Powered Zone 2  Powered Zone      gt No   gt  Yes   Zone 2 3 speakers can be used   Powered Zone 2 3  enabled      Note      If the  Speakers Type Front     setting is set to    Bi Amp      Powered Zone 2 3 cannot be used      When the    Powered Zone 2    setting is set to    Yes    and Zone 2  is turned on  the surround back and front high speakers cannot be  used      If the  Powered Zone 2    setting is set to    No     the  Powered  Zone 3    setting cannot be selected     Speaker Configuration    This setting is set automatically by Audyssey 2EQ Room  Correction and Speaker Setup   gt  page 35         With these settings  you can specify which speakers are  connected and a crossover frequency for each speaker   Specify    Full Band    for speakers that can output low  frequency bass sounds adequately  for example  speakers  with a good sized woofer  For smaller speakers  specify a  crossover frequency  Sounds below the crossover  frequency will be output by the subwoofer instead of the  speaker  Refer to your speaker   s manuals to determine the 
17.     On your TV  make sure that the video input to which      the AV receiver is connected is selected     When the AV receiver is not connected to a TV via     HDMI OUT MAIN  on screen menus are not  displayed        En82 Y    Appendix    E The on screen information does not appear       Depending on the input signal  the on screen 48  information may not appear when the input signal   from HDMI IN is output to a device connected to the  HDMI output     Tuner    E Reception is noisy  FM stereo reception is noisy   or the FM STEREO indicator doesn t light       Relocate your antenna       Move the AV receiver away from your TV or      computer     Listen to the station in mono  32    When listening to an AM station  operating the      remote controller may cause noise     Passing cars and airplanes can cause interference       Concrete walls weaken radio signals         If nothing improves the reception  install an outdoor      antenna     Remote Controller    Bi The remote controller doesn   t work       Before operating this unit  be sure to press        RECEIVER     Make sure that the batteries are installed with the 5  correct polarity     Install new batteries  Don t mix different types of 5  batteries  or old and new batteries     Make sure that the remote controller is not too far 5  away from the AV receiver  and that there s no  obstruction between the remote controller and the AV  receiver s remote control sensor    Make sure that the AV receiver is not subjected to 
18.     Pa Integra produkter    r knappnamnens begynnelsebokstav en versal  Till exempel       Fj  rrl  ge    knapp och    Display    knapp    Anm  rkningar      Fj  rrkontrollkoder kan inte anges f  r knapparna  RECEIVER  och flerzonsknappen      Endast fj  rrkontrollkoder f  r tv kan anges f  r  TV       F  rutom  RECEIVER    TV  och flerzonsknappen  kan fj  rrkontrollkoder f  r vilken som helst  kategori tilldelas f  r knapparna REMOTE MODE  Dessa knappar fungerar dock   ven som  ing  ngv  ljarknappar  s   anv  nd en knapp f  r REMOTE MODE som motsvarar ing  ngen som    du ansluter utrustningen till  Till exempel  om du ansluter din CD spelare till CD ing  ngen ska  du v  lja  TV CD  n  r du anger dess fj  rrkontrollkod     Anv  nd sifferknapparna f  r att ange den femsiffriga koden inom 30 sekunder    REMOTE MODE knapp Fj  rrindikatorlampa blinkar tv   g  nger    Om fj  rrkontrollkoden inte st  lldes in  blinkar REMOTE MODE    knappen fj  rrindikatorn l  ngsamt en g  ng    Anm  rkningar      Det blinkande elementet p   fj  rrkontrollen skiljer sig   t beroende p   din modell av AV receiver      Fj  rrkontrollen har f  rkonfigurerats med f  rvalda kanaler p   fj  rrkontrollen f  r olika  komponenter  Genom att ange en kod fr  n fj  rrkontrollkodlistan  kan du aktivera relevanta  f  rvalda kanaler f  r den utrustningen      Nar det finns flera olika koder f  r en tillverkare ska du f  rs  ka att ange dem en och en tills de  st  mmer   verens med din utrustning      Beroende p  
19.     Saturation    or    Color  Temperature        E Game Mode   5 6     Off    gt On  If video signal delay occurs during playback on a video  component  i e   game console   select the corresponding  input source and set the    Game Mode    setting to    On      The delay will decrease but in return the picture quality will  become poor     B Film Mode 4 6   gt  Video    Film Mode  detection is not applied and the input  signal is handled as a video source      Auto   Detects whether the input signal is a video or a  movie  If it is a movie  the appropriate conversion is  applied   The AV receiver will adjust to the picture source   automatically converting it to the appropriate progressive    signal and reproducing the natural quality of the original  picture     B Edge Enhancement  6 7   gt  Off     Low     Mid   gt  High    With this setting  you can make the picture appear sharper     E Noise Reduction   6 7    gt  Off    gt  Low    gt  Mid    gt  High  With this setting  you can reduce noise appearing on the  screen  Select the desired level     B Brightness   4 6        50 to 0 to  50    With this setting  you can adjust the picture brightness      250    is the darkest      50    is the brightest     E Contrast 146         50 to 0 to  50  With this setting  you can adjust contrast      50    is the  least      50    is the greatest     B Hue   4 6        50 to 0 to  50    With this setting  you can adjust the color hue between      50  and     50        Bi Saturation 
20.     and THX Select2 Plus     Certified receivers  With THX Loudness Plus  home  theater audiences can now experience the rich details in a  surround mix at any volume level  A consequence of  turning the volume below Reference Level is that certain  sound elements can be lost or perceived differently by  the listener  THX Loudness Plus compensates for the  tonal and spatial shifts that occur when the volume is  reduced by intelligently adjusting ambient surround  channel levels and frequency response  This enables  users experience the true impact of soundtracks  regardless of the volume setting  THX Loudness Plus is  automatically applied when listening in any THX  listening mode  The new THX Cinema  THX Music  and  THX Games modes are tailored to apply the proper THX  Loudness Plus settings for each type of content        Audio Adjust       ga    2 22 E  Setup   gt     a        lt    a          Audio Adjust    With the Audio Adjust functions and settings  you can  adjust the sound and listening modes as you like     Multiplex Mono    B Multiplex    Input Channel    gt  Main      Sub      Main Sub  This setting determines which channel of a stereo  multiplex source is output  Use it to select audio channels  or languages with multiplex sources  multilingual TV  broadcasts  and so on     E Mono  Input Channel      Left   Right      Left    gt  Right  This setting specifies the channel to be used for playing  any 2 channel digital source such as Dolby Digital  or 2   channel a
21.     v                Note      When    Monitor Out  is set to  Both   the    Resolution    setting  cannot be selected     Signal Selection   If signals are present at more than one input  the inputs will  be selected automatically in the following order of priority   HDMI  component video  composite video    However  for component video only  regardless of whether  a component video signal is actually present  if a  component video input is assigned to the input selector   that component video input will be selected  And if no  component video input is assigned to the input selector   this will be interpreted as no component video signal being  present    In the Signal Selection Example shown below  video  signals are present at both the HDMI and composite video  inputs  However  the HDMI signal is automatically  selected as the source and the video is output by the HDMI  output     Signal Selection Example             Blu ray Disc DVD player  etc        y Y y  Composite Component HDMI    AV receiver 32277   X     fg     MONITOR OUT  Composite Component HDMI    y Y y          TV  projector  etc              Audio Connection Formats    Audio components can be connected by using any of the  following audio connection formats  analog  optical   coaxial  or HDMI    When choosing a connection format  bear in mind that the  AV receiver does not convert digital input signals for  analog line outputs and vice versa     Tf signals are present at more than one input  the inputs will  
22.    3 Only the front panel USB input is compatible with 3 If you   re using an RI Dock  or cassette tape deck   iPod iPhone  change the Input Display   gt  page 46     4 Connect a turntable  MM  that has a built in phono preamp to  TV CD IN  or connect it to PHONO IN with the phono With RI  Remote Interactive   you can use the following Ai  preamp turned off  If your turntable  MM  doesn   t have a special functions  J  phono preamp  connect it to PHONO IN  If your turntable has l     a moving coil  MC  type cartridge  you ll need a commercially E System On Auto Power On 9 e g   cassette tape deck AUDIO OUT  available MC head amp or MC transformer to connect to When you start playback on a component connected via      PHONO IN  See your turntable   s manual for details    If your turntable has a ground wire  connect it to the AV   receiver   s GND screw  With some turntables  connecting the   ground wire may produce an audible hum  If this happens    disconnect it  E Direct Change   5 When you connect your personal computer to PC IN and select   the PC input selector  the video of the personal computer is 1     output from the HDMI outputs  However  if you have assigned RI  the AV                  automatically selects that   the HDMI inputs to the PC input selector  the AV receiver will component as the input source    output signals received from the HDMI inputs instead of    RI  while the AV receiver is on standby  the AV  receiver will automatically turn on and select that
23.    Powered Zone 3    setting is set to    Yes     this  setting cannot be selected     E Surround Back Ch     1ch   Select if only one surround back speaker L is  connected      2ch   Select if two  left and right  surround back speakers  are connected     Note    If the    Surround Back    setting is set to    None     this setting    cannot be selected     E LPF of LFE   Low Pass Filter for the LFE Channel    gt  80 Hz  90Hz  100Hz  120 Hz   gt  Off   Low Pass Filter is not applied   With this setting  you can specify the cutoff frequency of  the LFE channel   s low pass filter  LPF   which can be  used to filter out unwanted hum  The LPF only applies to  sources that use the LFE channel   Note    If you re using THX certified speakers  select    80Hz         Subwoofer Phase  23     180      Moves the subwoofer phase   Note      If the    Subwoofer    setting is set to    No     this setting cannot be  selected        Double Bass    This setting is NOT set automatically by    Audyssey 2EQ   Room Correction and Speaker Setup   2 page 35            On    gt  Off THX    Turn this setting on to boost bass output by feeding bass  sounds from the front left  right  and center channels to  the subwoofer     Note      When the    Subwoofer    setting is set to    No    or the    Front     setting to anything other than    Full Band     this setting is fixed to             This setting is set to    On    automatically when the    Subwoofer     and    Front    settings are set for th
24.    Turning On 8 Basic Operations    Audyssey 2EQ  Auto Setup    This step performs the automatic speaker setup     1 Use A F to select one of the following options  and  then press ENTER       Do it Now   The automatic speaker setup is performed  following instructions on screen  Refer to step 2  of    Using the Automatic Speaker Setup       page 35   When this setting is complete  the  setup wizard continues to    Source Connection        gt  Do it Later   Skips this setting   Press ENTER and continue to    Source  Connection        Source Connection    This step checks the connection of source components     1 Use A Y to select one of the following options  and  then press ENTER    gt  Yes  Continue   Performs the checkings      No  Skip   Skips this step and continues to    Remote Mode  Setup        2 Select the input selector for which you want to  check the connection and press ENTER   The picture of the corresponding source should appear  on screen with a verification prompt     3 When prompted  use A V to select one of the  following options and then press ENTER     gt  Yes   Confirms that the source is properly displayed              Displays an error report  Follow the  troubleshooting instructions and recheck the  source     4 Use A Y to select one of the following options  and  then press ENTER    gt  Yes   Returns to step 2      No  Done Checking   The setup wizard continues to    Remote Mode  Setup        Remote Mode Setup    With this step  you can enter remote 
25.    Update    and press ENTER    The update process will begin    During the update process  the on screen display may  disappear depending on the updated program  When  this occurs  you can still view the update progress on  the AV receiver   s display  The on screen display will  reappear after the update is complete  and upon  turning the AV receiver off and on again     The message    Completed     appears on the AV  receiver   s display  indicating that the update has  been completed     Turn off the AV receiver using DON STANDBY on  the front panel    Do not use ORECEIVER on the remote controller   Once turned off  the AV receiver will automatically  turn on again    Congratulations  You now have the latest firmware  installed on your Onkyo AV receiver     Troubleshooting    Case 1    If an error occurs     Error         is displayed on the AV  receiver   s display   Alpha numeric characters on the front  display are denoted by asterisks   Refer to the following  table and take appropriate action     E Errors during an update via network       Error Code Description         10    20 The Ethernet cable was not detected     Reconnect the cable properly          11    13    21    Internet connection error      28 Check the following items      Make sure the IP address  subnet mask   gateway address  and DNS server are  configured properly    Make sure the router is turned on    Make sure the AV receiver and the router are    connected with an Ethernet cable    Make sure you
26.    gt  page 48      E Firmware Update     With this selection  you can update the firmware of the  AV receiver  Note that this selection will be grayed out  for a short while after the AV receiver is turned on   Please wait until it becomes operable   Press ENTER to start the procedure   page 86      5       Using the Sleep Timer    With the sleep timer  you can set the AV receiver to turn  off automatically after a specified period     1 Press RECEIVER once followed by SLEEP  repeatedly to select the required sleep time   The sleep time can be set from 90 to 10 minutes in 10  minute steps   The SLEEP indicator lights on the AV receiver   s  display when the sleep timer has been set  The  specified sleep time appears for about 5 seconds  then  the previous display reappears   Tip    If you need to cancel the sleep timer  press SLEEP  repeatedly until the SLEEP indicator goes off     To check the time remaining until the AV receiver sleeps   press SLEEP  Note that if you press again on SLEEP as    the time being displayed is 10 minutes or less  the sleep  timer will go off     Setting the Display Brightness    You can adjust the brightness of the AV receiver   s display   and switch the MASTER VOLUME indicator off and on  in conjunction     1 Press RECEIVER once followed by DIMMER   repeatedly to cycle through the following patterns      Normal brightness   indicator off      Dim brightness   indicator off      Dimmer brightness   indicator off      Normal brightness   indicat
27.   1 46         50 to 0 to  50  With this setting  you can adjust saturation      50    is the  weakest color      50    is the strongest color     E Color Temperature 4 6   gt  Warm   gt  Normal     Cool       En 63       Advanced Operations  With this setting  you can adjust the color temperature     Note         Picture Adjust    cannot be used when       The NET input selector is selected  or         Monitor Out    is set to    Sub      gt  page 53     1 This procedure can also be performed on the remote controller  by using the Quick Setup   gt  page 48     2 When a 3D video source is input     Wide Mode    is fixed to     Full       3 When    Metadata Compatible    is enabled   gt  page 57       Picture Mode    is fixed to    Direct       4 When the    Picture Mode    setting is set to anything other than     Custom     this setting cannot be used    5 If the    Resolution    setting is set to    4K Upscaling       page 53   this setting is fixed at    Off       6 Press CLR if you want to reset to the default value    7 Tf the    Game Mode    setting is set to    On     this setting is fixed  at    Off        Audio Selector       Audio Selector   gt  ARC   The audio signal from your TV tuner can be sent to  HDMI OUT MAIN of the AV receiver  1  With this selection  the TV   s audio can be  automatically selected as a priority among other  assignments    gt  HDMI   This can be selected when HDMI IN has been  assigned as an input source  If both HDMI  HDMI  IN  and digital 
28.   2    Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO indicator  goes off on the AV receiver   s display     Press and hold TUNING A V   The frequency stops changing when you release the  button     Press the buttons repeatedly to change the frequency  one step at a time     B Tuning into stations by frequency  You can tune into AM and FM stations directly by entering  the appropriate frequency     On the remote controller  press TUNER repeatedly  to select    AM    or    FM     followed by D TUN            Actual display depends on the country      Within 8 seconds  use the number buttons to enter  the frequency of the radio station    For example  to tune to 87 5  FM   press 8  7  5 or 8   7  5  0    If you have entered the wrong number  you can retry  after 8 seconds     Presetting AM FM Stations    You can store a combination of up to 40 of your favorite  AM FM radio stations as presets     1    2    Tune into the AM FM station that you want to store  as a preset   See the previous section     Press MEMORY   The preset number flashes        dz    JT           Actual display depends on the country      While the preset number is flashing  about 8  seconds   use PRESET  lt     to select a preset from  1 through 40        En32 Y    4    Turning On 8 Basic Operations    Press MEMORY again to store the station or  channel    The station or channel is stored and the preset number  stops flashing    Repeat this procedure for all of your favorite AM FM  radio stations     E Selecting Presets
29.   AV receiver will output no sound through its speakers  In this  case     TV Speaker    appears on the AV receiver   s display by  pressing DISPLAY    When    HDMI Control RIHD     is set to    On     this setting is  fixed to    Auto       With some TVs and input signals  no sound may be output even  when this setting is set to    On       When    Audio TV Out    or    HDMI Control RIHD     is set to     On    and you re listening through your TV s speakers     page 16   turning up the AV receiver s volume control will  make the sound be output from the AV receiver   s front left and  right speakers  To stop the AV receiver   s speakers producing    sound  change the settings  change your TV   s settings  or turn  down the AV receiver   s volume      Listening mode cannot be changed when this setting is set to     On    and the input source is not HDMI        Audio Return Channel  ARC      Off     Auto   The audio signal from your TV tuner can be sent to  HDMI OUT MAIN of the AV receiver   The audio return channel  ARC  function allows an ARC  capable TV to send the audio stream to HDMI OUT MAIN  of the AV receiver  To use this function  you must select  the TV CD input selector and your TV must be ARC  capable  Default setting                   ly To be continued    Note     This setting is fixed to               when the    HDMI  Control RIHD     setting is set to    Off         This setting is set to    Auto    automatically when the    HDMI  Control RIHD     setting is 
30.   Domain Name System  translates domain  names into IP addresses  For example  when you enter a  domain name such as www onkyousa com in your Web  browser  before accessing the site  your browser uses DNS  to translate this into an IP address  in this case  63 148 251 142        MAC Address  This is the AV receiver s MAC  Media Access Control   address  This address cannot be changed     B DHCP      Enable      Disable  This setting determines whether or not the AV receiver  uses DHCP to automatically configure its IP Address   Subnet Mask  Gateway  and DNS Server settings     Note      If you select    Disable     you must configure the    IP Address       Subnet Mask        Gateway     and    DNS Server    settings  yourself     BIP Address     Class A      10 0 0 0    to    10 255 255 255        Class B      172 16 0 0    to    172 31 255 255        Class C      192 168 0 0    to    192 168 255 255     Enter a static IP address provided by your Internet Service  Provider  ISP    Most routers use Class C IP addresses        Subnet Mask  Enter the subnet mask address provided by your ISP   typically 255 255 255 0      B Gateway  Enter the gateway address provided by your ISP     E DNS Server  Enter the DNS server address provided by your ISP     B Proxy URL  To use a Web proxy  enter its URL here     E Proxy Port  If you re using a Web proxy  enter a proxy port number  here     Bi Network Standby    gt On    gt  Off  This setting enables or disables control over the network 
31.   Music Optimizer  ge     On   D Setting target       Setting options  default setting underlined           BD DVD   Input   Audio   Video  Information  Listening Mode                         En 48 Y    Advanced Operations       Input      You can select input sources and view the following  information  the name of input selectors  input  assignments  radio information  and ARC function  setting   In addition  previews of the video streams coming from  HDMI inputs  HDMI IN 1 2 3 4 AUX INPUT  are  displayed  1  Use A V to select an input source and view the related  information  Pressing ENTER switches to the selected  input source     B Audio   gt  page 49       You can change the following settings     Bass         Treble        Subwoofer Level        Center Level         Audyssey        Dynamic EQ         Dynamic Volume   2        Late Night        Music  Optimizer        Re EQ    and    Re EQ THX         E Video         You can change the following settings     Wide Mode     and    Picture Mode 4      See also        Picture Adjust    gt  page 62     B Information s    You can view the information of the following items      Audio        Video    and    Tuner        E Listening              You can select the listening modes that are grouped in  the following categories     MOVIE TV        MUSIC         GAME     and    THX      Use A V to select the category and 4    to select the  listening mode  Press ENTER to switch to the  selected listening mode     Ly To be continue
32.   Settings    to    No      gt  page 57       If you make Dynamic Volume active     Dynamic EQ    is set to     On     The Dynamic Vol indicator will light       When    Dynamic EQ    is set to    Off      Dynamic Volume  is  automatically switched to    Off        About Audyssey Dynamic EQ     Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of  deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by  taking into account human perception and room  acoustics  Dynamic EQ selects the correct frequency  response and surround levels moment by moment at any  user selected volume setting  The result is bass response   tonal balance  and surround impression that remain  constant despite changes in volume  Dynamic EQ  combines information from incoming source levels with  actual output sound levels in the room  a prerequisite for  delivering a loudness correction solution    Audyssey Dynamic EQ works well by itself  However  if  Audyssey 2EQ is on  the two technologies work in  tandem to provide well balanced sound for every listener  at any volume level        About Audyssey Dynamic Volume     Audyssey Dynamic Volume solves the problem of large  variations in volume level between television programs   commercials  and between the soft and loud passages of  movies  Dynamic Volume looks at the preferred volume  setting by the user and then monitors how the volume of  program material is being perceived by listeners in real  time to decide whether an adjustment is needed   Whenever necessary  Dyna
33.   TV is preprogrammed with the remote control code for  controlling a TV that supports the            limited to  some models   The TV must be able to receive remote  control commands via PRIHID and be connected to the  AV receiver via HDMI  If controlling your TV via  fRIFLD doesn   t work very well  program your TV   s  remote control code into TV and use the TV remote mode  to control your TV   Use the following remote control codes       11807 13100 13500    TV with RIHD    Controlling Apple TV    By programming the supplied remote controller with the  appropriate remote control code  you can use it to operate  your Apple TV   Use the following remote control codes    gt  02615   Apple TV    Controlling MHL Enabled Mobile Device  a Press the appropriate REMOTE    By programming the supplied remote controller with the MODE button first   appropriate remote control code  you can use it to operate  your MHL enabled mobile device   Connect your MHL enabled mobile device to the AUX      A SOURCE  INPUT MHL jack  We advise you to program the remote  control code on the AUX button   Use the following remote control codes    North American and Taiwanese models      33101   MHL enabled mobile device   European  Australian  and Asian models      32910   MHL enabled mobile device    ZONE2 ZONE3    Note      With some mobile devices  reliable operation cannot be   1       p     PREV CH  Puvusr    guaranteed     Controlling a Blu ray Disc DVD Player  HD  DVD Player or DVD Recorder    
34.   When enabled  the NET indicator will be dimly lit while  the AV receiver is in standby mode  Note that the indicator  may not light under certain conditions   gt  page 52      Note      When set to    On     the power consumption slightly increases in  standby mode     E Update Notice      Enable      Disable  When this setting is enabled  you will be notified if a  firmware update via network is available        Note      Selecting  Never Remind me    on the notification window will  switch this setting to    Disable      gt  page 20       For details on the update notification  see    If the    Firmware  Update Available    window appears       gt  page 20      Initial Setup    If you skipped the initial setup wizard  for example on  first time use  you can reaccess it from here   See    Initial Setup      gt  page 21      Remote Controller Setup    T G     i  2t ET    Setup         iet      MainMenu    Remote Controller Setup    Remote ID    E Remote ID    gt 1  2      3  When several Onkyo components are used in the same  room  their remote ID codes may overlap  To differentiate  the AV receiver from other components  you can change  its remote ID from    1     to    2    or    3        Note      If you do change the AV receiver s remote ID  be sure to change  the remote controller to the same ID  see below   otherwise  you  won t be able to control it with the remote controller     A      69 Y    Advanced Operations    Changing the remote controller   s ID    While hol
35.   any loud surprises when you turn on the AV receiver   always turn down the volume before you turn it off     Tip     The HYBRID STANDBY indicator may light depending on the  status of settings   gt  page 52       For details on power management settings  see    Auto Standby         gt  page 68         En20 Y    Turning On 8 Basic Operations       Smooth Operation in a Few Easy Steps   Initial Setup    To ensure smooth operation  here s a few easy steps to   help you configure the AV receiver before you use it for   the very first time  These settings only need to be made   once  See    Initial Setup    for details   page 21         If the  Firmware Update Available  window  appears   When a new version of the firmware is available  the  notification window  Firmware Update Available   pops up  This notification only appears when the AV  receiver is connected to your home network    page 96   To perform the firmware update  follow  the instructions on screen   Use A V and ENTER on the AV receiver or remote  controller to select one of the options      Update Now   Starts the firmware update   Refer to    Firmware Update      gt  page 86       Remind me Later   The update notification will pop up again the next  time you turn the AV receiver on    gt  Never Remind me   Disables the automatic update notification   Tip    The update notification window can be enabled or disabled in     Update Notice      gt  page 69         Initial Setup    This section explains the settings th
36.   cannot be adjusted        Audyssey      B Audyssey  See    Audyssey    in    Source Setup    gt  page 60      B Dynamic EQ  See    Dynamic EQ  in    Source Setup    page 60      B Dynamic Volume  See    Dynamic Volume    in    Source Setup      gt  page 61      Note      These technologies can be used when all the following conditions  are met       Room Correction and Speaker Setup is completed  Note that     Audyssey    requires the    Audyssey 2EQ Full Calibration   method         Any listening mode other than Direct or Pure Audio is selected         A pair of headphones is not connected    The setting is stored individually for each input selector      Dynamic EQ  and    Dynamic Volume  cannot be selected  when any of the THX listening modes is selected  with   Loudness Plus    set to    On    or  Preserve THX Settings    set to     Yes      gt  page 57      Late Night    E Late Night  For Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus sources  the  options are    gt  Off   gt  Low   Small reduction in dynamic range    gt  High   Large reduction in dynamic range   For Dolby TrueHD sources  the options are      Auto      The Late Night function is set to    On    or    Off     automatically    gt  Off   gt On    Turn this setting on to reduce the dynamic range of Dolby  Digital material so that you can still hear quiet parts even  when listening at low volume levels   ideal for watching  movies late at night when you don   t want to disturb  anyone     Note     The effect of the L
37.   click    OK      A list of the supported devices appears     4 Select the AV receiver in the list  and then click     Allow        The corresponding icon will be checked     A En 29 Y    Turning On 8 Basic Operations    5 Click    OK    to close the dialog box   This completes the Windows Media Player 11  configuration   You can now play the music files in your Windows  Media Player 11 library through the AV receiver   Tip    Windows Media Player 11 can be downloaded for free from  the Microsoft web site     Remote Playback    You need to connect the AV receiver to your home  network   gt  page 96   The on screen information  appears only on a TV that is connected to HDMI  outputs     Remote Playback means you can play the music files  stored on a media server or personal computer with the AV  receiver by operating the controller device in the home  network     Windows Media Player 12 Setup    This section explains how to configure Windows Media  Player 12 so that the AV receiver can play the music files  stored on your personal computer     1 Start Windows Media Player 12     2 On the    Stream    menu  select    Turn on media  streaming      A dialog box appears   Tip    If the media streaming is already activated  clicking on     More streaming options       in the    Stream    menu will    display a list of the playback devices connected to the  network  You can skip step 3     Ly To be continued    5       3    Move your cursor and click on    Turn on media  streaming 
38.   code    The REMOTE MODE button Remote indicator flashes twice    If the remote control code is not entered successfully  the REMOTE MODE   button Remote indicator will flash once slowly    Notes      The flashing element of the remote controller will differ according to your AV receiver  s model      The remote controller is preconfigured with remote controller presets of different components   By entering a code from the Remote Control Code list  you can activate the relevant preset for  that component      When there are multiple codes related to one manufacturer  try and enter them one by one until  it matches your component      Depending on the model and year of your component  compatibility is not guaranteed      With some models  the remote controller may not not work or its compatibility may be limited  to part of the component s functionality      Besides  it is not possible to add new codes to the existing remote controller presets      Though the provided remote control codes are correct at the time of printing  they are subject to  change by the manufacturer     Codes de t  l  commande    1    Tout en maintenant enfonc   le bouton REMOTE MODE auquel vous souhaitez   associer un code  pressez et maintenez enfonc   le bouton  DISPLAY   pendant   environ 3 secondes     Le bouton REMOTE              t  moin Remote s allume    Les noms de boutons sont en manjuscules sur les produits Integra  Par exemple  le   bouton    Remote Mode    et le bouton    Display       Rem
39.   component as the input source  5     ANALOG  AUDIO OUT       When playback is started on a component connected via    Note    e Use        RI cables for RI connections  RI cables are supplied                                              E Remote Control i    signals from PC IN  To have the signals output from PC IN       with Onkyo components      E  gt  for    PC    in the    HDMI Input  setting You can use the AV receiver   s remote controller to   Some components have two RI jacks  You can connect either  5 ve               gt  page 53   control your other Ri capable Onkyo components  one to the AV receiver  The other jack is for connecting      With connection  3   you can enjoy Dolby Digital and pointing the remote controller at the AV receiver s additional RI capable components         remote control sensor instead of      component  You   Connect only Onkyo components to RI jacks  Connecting other  DTS   To listen in Zone 2 3 as well  use  3  and 151  must enter the appropriate remote control code first manufacturer   s components may cause a malfunction   e With connection  5   you can enjoy audio from external   gt  page 77    Some components may not support all RI functions  Refer to the  components while you are in Zone 2 3  manuals supplied with your Onkyo components   e With connection  5   if your Blu ray Disc DVD player   While Zone 2 3 is on  the System On Auto Power On and Direct  has both the main stereo and multichannel outputs  be Change RI functions do 
40.   gt  page 77         Press the appropriate REMOTE  MODE button first     RECEIVER  ISPLA         REMO        JINPUT SELECTOR    1  hA BD DVD               STB DVR     SP GUIDE   PLAYLIS          N    N     gt  A  SETUP  WS    D TUN  DIMMER SLEEP    ONKYO    RC 836M          En 74 V    Controlling Other Components    Bi RI Dock operation       Available buttons                             D  TOP MENU      OSOURCE    O  4 1 4  gt   ENTER     DISPLAY 3  PLAYLIST  lt   gt     MUTING     m  I  B   lt  lt   gt  gt   ALBUM      Maa  nl   VOL A Y     REPEAT MENU   RANDOM    MODE   4               With some iPod iPhone models  generations and RI Docks    certain buttons may not work as expected      For detailed operation of iPod iPhone  please refer to the   instruction manual of the RI Dock     1 TOP MENU works as the mode button when used with the  DS A2 RI Dock     2 This button does not turn the Onkyo DS A2 or DS A2X RI  Dock on or off  Also  your iPod iPhone may not respond the  first time you press this button  in which case you should press  it again  This is because the remote controller transmits the On  and Standby commands alternately  so if your iPod iPhone is  already on  it will remain on when the remote controller  transmits the On command  Similarly  if your iPod iPhone is  already off  it will remain off when the remote controller  transmits the Off command     3 DISPLAY turns on the backlight for a few seconds     4 Resume mode  With the Resume function  you can re
41.   separate instructions for more information          2 Press MODE D  blue  on the remote controller     If you want to rename a station  select the desired station and       ress MENU  Then  use A V to select    Rename this station    and  1 Select    Network    on the Setup menu to verify your us ENTER  3 Use A V  4  gt  to select an icon to move  and then    IP address C page          You can save up to 40 Internet radio stations  press ENTER   Take a note of the IP address     Use A Y  4    to select another icon as the  2 On your computer  start your web browser  destination  and then press ENTER     The icons switch positions and the message    Enter the AV receiver   s IP address in the browser   s     Completed     appears     Internet address  URL  field   If you are using Internet Explorer    you can also enter  the URL by selecting    Open       on the    File    menu     Q    Information on the AV receiver is then shown on your  Internet browser  Web Setup      4 Click on the    My Favorites    tab  and enter the  Internet radio station   s name and URL        En28 V ley       Playing Music Files on a Server    You need to connect the AV receiver to your home  network   gt  page 96   The on screen information  appears only on a TV that is connected to HDMI  outputs     This section explains how to play music files on a  computer or media server through the AV receiver  Server  Playback      1 Start your computer or media server     2 Press NET   The network servic
42.   using Windows Media  Player      WMA files must have the copyright option turned off      Sampling rates of 8 kHz  11 025 kHz  12 kHz  16 kHz   22 05 kHz  24 kHz  32 kHz  44 1 kHz  48 kHz  bitrates of  between 5 kbps and 320 kbps  and WMA DRM are  supported      WMA Pro Voice formats are not supported     E WMA Lossless                 WMA      Sampling rates of 44 1 kHz  48 kHz  88 2 kHz  96 kHz  are supported      Quantization bit  16 bit  24 bit    E WAV   wav       WAV    WAV files contain uncompressed PCM digital audio      Sampling rates of 8 kHz  11 025 kHz  12 kHz  16 kHz   22 05 kHz  24 kHz  32 kHz  44 1 kHz  48 kHz  64 kHz     88 2 kHz  96 kHz  176 4 kHz and 192 kHz are supported       Quantization bit  8 bit  16 bit  24 bit    E AAC    aac  m4a  mp4  3gp  392  AAC  M4A  MP4    3GP or  3G2    AAC stands for MPEG 2 MPEG 4 Audio      Sampling rates of 8 kHz  11 025 kHz  12 kHz  16 kHz   22 05 kHz  24 kHz  32 kHz  44 1 kHz  48 kHz  64 kHz   88 2 kHz  96 kHz and bitrates of between 8 kbps and  320 kbps are supported     B FLAC   flac or  FLAC    FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression      Sampling rates of 8 kHz  11 025 kHz  12 kHz  16 kHz   22 05 kHz  24 kHz  32 kHz  44 1 kHz  48 kHz  64 kHz     88 2 kHz  96 kHz  176 4 kHz and 192 kHz are supported       Quantization bit  8 bit  16 bit  24 bit    E Ogg Vorbis   ogg or  OGG      Sampling rates of 8 kHz  11 025 kHz  12 kHz  16 kHz   22 05 kHz  24 kHz  32 kHz  44 1 kHz  48 kHz and  bitrates of between
43.  32900 33100 33500   Onkyo Blu ray Disc player    32901 33104 33504   Onkyo HD DVD player   gt  70868   Onkyo MD recorder without RI     gt  71323    Onkyo CD recorder without RI   gt  82990    Onkyo Dock without RI    Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons    You can reset a REMOTE MODE button to its default  remote control code     1 While holding down the REMOTE MODE button  that you want to reset  press and hold down HOME  until the remote indicator lights  about 3 seconds      2 Within 30 seconds  press the REMOTE MODE  button again     The remote indicator flashes twice  indicating that the  button has been reset    Each REMOTE MODE button is preprogrammed  with a remote control code  When a button is reset  its  preprogrammed code is restored     Resetting the Remote Controller    You can reset the remote controller to its default settings     1 While holding down RECEIVER  press and hold  down HOME until the remote indicator lights   about 3 seconds     2 Within 30 seconds  press RECEIVER again     The remote indicator flashes twice  indicating that the  remote controller has been reset     A En 77 V    Controlling Other Components    Controlling Other Components    By pressing the REMOTE MODE button that s been  programmed with the remote control code for your  component  you can control your component as described  below    For details on entering a remote control code for other  components  see    Entering Remote Control Codes         gt  page 76      Controlling a TV  
44.  48 kbps and 500 kbps are supported   Incompatible files cannot be played     B LPCM  Linear PCM      Sampling rates of 8 kHz  11 025 kHz  12 kHz  16 kHz   22 05 kHz  24 kHz  32 kHz  44 1 kHz  48 kHz  64 kHz   88 2 kHz and 96 kHz are supported      Quantization bit  8 bit  16 bit  24 bit     Only for playback via network     B Apple Lossless   m4a  mp4  M4A  MP4      Sampling rates of 8 kHz  11 025 kHz  12 kHz  16 kHz   22 05 kHz  24 kHz  32 kHz  44 1 kHz  48 kHz  64 kHz   88 2 kHz and 96 kHz are supported      Quantization bit  16 bit  24 bit    A En98       Appendix    E DSD   dsf or  DSF     The sampling rate of 2 8224 MHz is supported        Dolby True HD   vr  mip  VR  MLP     Sampling rates of 48 kHz  64 kHz  88 2 kHz  96 kHz   176 4 kHz and 192 kHz are supported     About DLNA    The Digital Living Network Alliance is an international   cross industry collaboration  Members of DLNA develop a  concept of wired and wireless interoperable networks  where digital content such as photos  music  and videos can  be shared through consumer electronics  personal  computers  and mobile devices in and beyond the home   The AV receiver complies with the DLNA Interoperability  Guidelines version 1 5     License and Trademark  Information    Appendix             x v Color    is a trademark of Sony Corporation        Master Audio    Manufactured under license under U S  Patent Nos  5 956 674   5 974 380  6 226 616  6 487 535  7 212 872  7 333 929   7 392 195  7 272 567  amp  other U 
45.  A V  lt     para seleccionar     OK    y luego pulse ENTER    Aparecer   una pantalla de confirmaci  n de la  informaci  n de la cuenta     Si no tiene una cuenta  seleccione    Access without  Sign In    y pulse ENTER para utilizar una versi  n  restringida del servicio    Tenga en cuenta que el uso estar   restringido     Consejo      Si desea utilizar m  ltiples cuentas de usuario  consulte    Uso  de m  ltiples cuentas      gt  p  gina 1   Se puede iniciar  sesi  n desde la pantalla    Users        Utilice A V para seleccionar un men   y luego pulse  ENTER    Para salir  utilice       para seleccionar    Sign out    en  esta pantalla y luego pulse ENTER     Utilice A V para seleccionar una emisora y luego  pulse ENTER o    gt  para iniciar la reproducci  n de  la emisora    Aparecer   la pantalla de reproducci  n     6 Puede controlar las pistas con los botones del    mando a distancia   Botones activados  B    LE  W      1    Bi Elementos del men     Rate Song as Favorite    Guarda informaci  n en el servidor  haciendo que sea  m  s probable que la canci  n se vuelva a reproducir   Ban Song    Guarda informaci  n en el servidor  haciendo que sea    menos probable que la canci  n se vuelva a reproducir     Ban Artist    Guarda informaci  n en el servidor  haciendo que sea  menos probable que las canciones de este artista se  vuelvan a reproducir    Mark Favorite    A  ade la emisora que se est   reproduciendo  actualmente a los favoritos    Unmark Favorite    Elimina la 
46.  AV receiver allows you to update the firmware using  network connection on the rear panel     Note      Make sure your AV receiver and TV are turned on and an  Ethernet cable is connected to the rear panel of the AV receiver      Never unplug or turn off the AV receiver while it is being  updated      Never plug or unplug an HDMI or Ethernet cable during the  update process      Do not attempt to access the AV receiver from your PC while it  is being updated      Never unplug the power cord during the update process      It takes up to 60 minutes to complete the firmware update      The AV receiver will retain all your settings after the update is  finished     Before Starting      Set the    HDMI Control RIHD     setting to    Off      2 page 67       Turn off the controller device connected via Ethernet  cable      Turn off Multi Zone if this function is present      Stop playback of contents from Internet Radio   iPod iPhone  USB or servers  etc     L To be continued    Update Procedure    1    Press RECEIVER followed by HOME on the remote  controller   The Home menu appears on the TV screen     Select    Firmware Update    and press ENTER   Note that the    Firmware Update    option will be  grayed out for a short while after the AV receiver is  turned on  Please wait until it becomes operable     Select    Update via NET    and press ENTER    Note that this option will not be available if there is no  firmware file newer than the currently installed  version     Select 
47.  If the  Monitor Out    setting is set to    Sub     this setting is fixed  to  Through       If the    Monitor Out    setting is set to    Both     this setting is fixed  to  Auto       With some TVs  there may be no picture when this setting is set  to  4K Upscaling         En 53 Y    Advanced Operations  HDMI Input    If you connect a video component to an HDMI input  you  must assign that input to an input selector  For example  if  you connect your Blu ray Disc DVD player to HDMI IN 2   you must assign    HDMI2    to the    BD DVD    input  selector    If you    ve connected your TV to the AV receiver with an  HDMI cable  composite video and component video  sources can be upconverted  and output by the HDMI  output  You can set this for each input selector by selecting  the                  option  See    Video Connection Formats    for  more information on video signal flow and upconversion      gt  page 90      Composite video   component video             Composite video   component video    Here are the default assignments                                Input selector Default assignment  BD DVD HDMI   CBL SAT HDMI   STB DVR HDMI3   GAME HDMI4   PC HDMIS     AUX FRONT  Fixed   TV CD        j        PHONO  eee            E BD DVD  CBL SAT  STB DVR  GAME  PC  TV CD   PHONO   gt  HDMI  HDMI  HDMI3  HDMIA  HDMIS   HDMI6  HDMI7   Select the input to which the component has been  connected     Output composite video and component video  sources from the HDMI output  The vi
48.  Level and Impedance   4 6 V 470 Q  PRE OUT   Phono Overload 70 mV  MM 1 kHz 0 5    Frequency Response 5 Hz   100 kHz  1 dB   3 dB  Direct mode   Tone Control Characteristics     10 dB  50 Hz  BASS    10 dB  20 kHz  TREBLE     Signal to Noise Ratio 106 dB  LINE  IHF A   80 dB  PHONO MM  IHF A     Speaker Impedance 40   160    Video Section    Input Sensitivity Output Level and Impedance    1 Vp p 75 Q  Component Y   0 7 Vp p 75     Component            Pr Cr   1 Vp p 75 Q  Composite   Component Video Frequency Response  5 Hz   100 MHz  0 dB   3 dB    Tuner Section    FM Tuning Frequency Range     North American and Taiwanese   87 5 MHz   107 9 MHz   Others  87 5 MHz   108 0 MHz  RDS    AM Tuning Frequency Range  522 530 kHz   1611 1710 kHz    Preset Channel 40  General  Power Supply  North American and Taiwanese     AC 120 V  60 Hz   Others  AC 220   240 V  50 60 Hz     North American and Taiwanese  6 8 A   Others  640 W    No sound Power Consumption     North American and Taiwanese  90 W   European and Australian  95 W    Stand by Power Consumption  0 1 W  Dimensions  W x H x D     435 mm x 174 mm x 379 mm  17 1 8  x 6 7 8  x 14 15 16     Power Consumption    Weight 12 1 kg  26 7 lbs     B HDMI   Input IN 1  IN 2  IN 3  IN 4  IN 5  IN 6  IN 7   AUX INPUT   Output OUT MAIN  OUT SUB   Video Resolution 1080p    Audio Format Dolby TrueHD  DTS HD Master Audio     DVD Audio  DSD    3D  Audio Return Channel  DeepColor   x v Color  LipSync  CEC  RIHD     A En 100 Y    Supported    A
49.  Multi Zone Taste  k  nnen die  Fernbedienungscodes jeder Kategorie den REMOTE MODE Tasten zugewiesen werden   Allerdings dienen diese Tasten auch als Quellenwahltasten  W  hlen Sie also nach M  glichkeit  eine REMOTE MODE Taste  die dem Eingang zugeordnet ist  an den Sie die betreffende Quelle  angeschlossen haben  Wenn Sie z B  einen CD Player an den CD Eingang anschlie  en  sollten  Sie  TV CD  wenn Sie den Fernbedienungscode eingeben     Geben Sie mit den Zifferntasten innerhalb von 30 Sekunden den 5 stelligen   Herstellercode ein    Die REMOTE MODE Taste Remote Anzeige blinkt zwei Mal    Wenn der Fernbedienungscode nicht ordnungsgem     eingegeben wurde  blinkt die   REMOTE MODE Taste Remote Anzeige einmal langsam    Hinweise      Das blinkende Element auf der Fernbedienung unterscheidet sich je nach AV Receiver Modell      Die Fernbedienung ist mit den Voreinstellungen der Fernbedienung der verschiedenen  Komponenten vorkonfiguriert  Indem ein Code aus der Liste der Fernbedienungscodes  eingegeben wird  k  nnen Sie die entsprechende Voreinstellung f  r die Komponente aktivieren      Wenn es mehrere Codes gibt  die sich auf einen Hersteller beziehen  versuchen Sie sie einzeln  einzugeben  bis einer mit Ihrer Komponente   bereinstimmt      Dies h  ngt vom Modell und Herstellungsjahr Ihrer Komponente ab und die Kompatibilit  t ist  nicht garantiert      Es kann sein  dass bei einigen Modellen die Fernbedienung nicht funktioniert oder ihre  Kompatibilit  t sich auf nur auf 
50.  On  amp  Basic Operations        7 A                     Pressing RECEIVER followed by SP  speaker layout   repeatedly allows you to select the speakers you want to use   front high  front wide  or surround back  However  the  available speakers depend on the settings of      Speaker Configuration      gt  page 55      B Onkyo Original DSP Listening Modes    Turning On  amp  Basic Operations          Listening Mode    Description    Input  Source    Speaker  Layout          Listening Mode Description Input Speaker  Source  Layout  Orchestra Suitable for classical or operatic music  this               5 1     Orchestra    mode emphasizes the surround channels in  order to widen the stereo image  and  simulates the natural reverberation of a large  hall        Unplugged    Unplugged    Suitable for acoustic instruments  vocals and  jazz  this mode emphasizes the front stereo  image  giving the impression of being right  in front of the stage        Studio Mix    Studio Mix    Suitable for rock or pop music  listening to  music in this mode creates a lively sound  field with a powerful acoustic image  like  being at a club or rock concert           TV Logic This mode adds realistic acoustics to TV    shows produced in a      studio  surround  IV Logie effects to the entire sound  and clarity to  voices   Game RPG In this mode  the sound has a dramatic feel  with a similar atmosphere to Orchestra  Game RPG    mode        Game Action    Game Action    In this mode  sound localiza
51.  Philips 20739  Telegazi 10037 United 10556  10037  10714  Wilson 10556 ReplayTV 20614  20616  Telemeister 10037 11037  10715  11652 Windsor 10668  11037 Sonic Blue 20614  20616  Telesonic 10037 Unitek 11709 Windy Sam 10556 Sony 20636  Telestar 10556  10037 Universal 10037  10714 Wintel 10714 TiVo 20636  20739  Teletech 10037  10668  11037 Universum 10037  10668  10195  World of Vision 12001  Teleview 10037   11037  10618  10512 Wyse 11365 TV VCR Combination  Tennessee 10037        10037 Xenius 10634 Amstrad 10171  Tensai 10037  11037  10715 V7 Videoseven 11666  11755 Xiahua 10698 Fersen 10625  Tesla 10556  10037  10714  Vestel E 10698 Fidelity 10171  11037  11652    Xrypton 10037 GoldStar 10037  Tevion 10556  10037  10714  Vexa 10037    10668  11037  11248  Victor 10650  10653  11428               Grundig 10556  10037  10195  11585  11667 Videocon 10037  10508 anal 10037 LG 10178  Thomson 10037  10625  10560 VideoSystem 10037 Yokan 10037 Mitsubishi 10556  Thorn 10037  10499  10512 Vidtech 10178 Yoko 10037 Philips 10556  10037  Thorn Ferguson 10499 Viewsonic 11365  11564  11755  Y MATO 10037 Radiola 10556  TMK 10178 12049 Zenith 10178  10037  11365  Saba 10625  Tokai 10037  10668  11037 Vision 10037 11423  12358 Sanyo 11974  Tokaido 11037 Vistron 11363 Zepto      Schneider 10556  10037  Topline 10668  11037 Vivax 11709 zn 10698           10818  Toshiba 10195  11037  10618  Vizio 11758  12209 VCR Siemens 10037  10650  10508  11169  Vortec 10037   Sony 11505  a 11524  11652  Vo
52.  Quick Setup are saved in this menu   gt  page 49      Tip    If you re using a handheld sound level meter  adjust the level of    each speaker so that it reads 75 dB SPL at the listening position   measured with C weighting and slow reading     Equalizer Settings    With the Equalizer settings  you can adjust the tone of  speakers individually with a 5 band equalizer  The volume  of each speaker can be set   gt  page 56         Manual Equalizer   gt  On   You can adjust the equalizer for each speaker  manually  Continue with the following procedure     1 Press Y to select    Channel     and then use  lt   gt  to  select a speaker     2 Use A Y to select a frequency  and then use the  lt   gt   to adjust the level at that frequency   The volume at each frequency can be adjusted from     6dB to 04   to  6dB in 1 dB steps   Tip  e You can select     63 Hz        250 Hz        1000Hz        4000 Hz     or     16000Hz     And for the subwoofer     25Hz        40Hz         63 Hz        100Hz     or    160Hz          Low frequencies  e g   63Hz  affect bass sounds  high  frequencies  e g   16000Hz  affect treble sounds     3 Use    to select    Channel     and then use  lt   gt  to  select another speaker   Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each speaker   You cannot select speakers that you set to    No    or     None    in the    Speaker Configuration       gt  page 55         Off   Tone off  response flat   Note      When the Direct or Pure Audio listening mode is selected  the  equalizer
53.  Resolution    settings  affect the video signal flow through the AV receiver     E Monitor Out      Main   Select this if your TV is connected to HDMI OUT  MAIN       Sub   Select this if your TV is connected to HDMI OUT  SUB     gt  Both   Select this if your TVs are connected to HDMI OUT  MAIN and HDMI OUT SUB  Video signals are    output from both HDMI outputs at the resolution  supported by both TVs     B Resolution   gt  Through   Select this to pass video through the AV receiver at  the same resolution and with no conversion    gt  Auto   Select this to have the AV receiver automatically  convert video at resolutions supported by your TV    gt  480p  480p 576p   720p  10801  1080p   Select the desired output resolution    gt  1080p 24   Select this for 1080p output at 24 frames per second    gt  4K Upscaling   Select this for an output resolution four times that of  1080p  Depending on the resolution supported by  your TV  it will result in either 3840 x 2160 or 4096  x 2160 pixels   You can specify the output resolution for HDMI OUT  MAIN and have the AV receiver upconvert the picture  resolution as necessary to match the resolution supported  by your TV        Tip    You can see the picture by pressing ENTER to check the     Resolution    setting  excluding NET input source      Note      Depending on the incoming video signal  the video playback may  not be smooth or the vertical resolution may be lowered  In this  case select anything other than    1080p 24        
54.  Unis  uniquement     1 Utilisez A Y pour s  lectionner    Sign in to your    account     puis appuyez sur ENTER    Vous devez poss  der un compte pour utiliser  Rhapsody  Si vous ne disposez pas encore d   un  compte  vous pouvez en cr  er un    partir de  www rhapsody com onkyo   Si vous poss  dez d  j   un compte Rhapsody   s  lectionnez    Sign in to your account     puis  appuyez sur ENTER    Saisissez votre nom utilisateur  en g  n  ral votre  adresse   lectronique  et votre mot de passe dans  l     cran clavier suivant ou dans Configuration Web     E Utilisation de l   cran clavier    1  Utilisez    Y 4    et ENTER pour saisir votre  nom d utilisateur et votre mot de passe    2  S  lectionnez    OK       3  Appuyez sur ENTER  L   cran    Confirm your  entries    s affiche    4  Appuyez sur ENTER     Conseil      Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes utilisateur   consultez    Utilisation de plusieurs comptes      page 1    L identification peut   tre r  alis  e    partir de l   cran     Users        2 Utilisez A V pour s  lectionner le menu  puis    appuyez sur ENTER    Search     Vous pouvez rechercher des morceaux par artiste  par  album ou par piste    Music Guide     Vous pouvez lire des pistes    partir des genres des  meilleurs artistes  des meilleurs albums  des  meilleures pistes  des nouveaut  s et des s  lections du  personnel    Rhapsody Channels       coutez les canaux de radio programm  e par les  meilleurs   diteurs de Rhapsody    Playlists     Per
55.  United 30675  30713  31152 LG 30741  31602 Magnavox 30646  30675  Sherwood 30741  33052 Universum 30741  30713 Limit 33052 Medion 30741  Shinsonic 30533 Urban Concepts 30503 Loewe 32474  32783 Panasonic 30490  31579  32523   Silva Schneider 30741 Vestel 30713                  30675             SilverCrest 31152 EE 31597 Marantz 32414  32432  33444 Philips 30046  31340  Skantic 30539  30713 VAD ae Momitsu 33052 nee 3063 1  32800  SM Electronic 31152 Virek 108            32147  32900  32910  Bye es  Smat 30713 Waltham 30713 33100  33101  33500  RCA 30522  Sony 30533  30864  31033  Wellington 30713 33501 Samsung 30490  31635  31070  31431  31516  Weltstar 30713 Oppo 32545 Schneider 30646  31633  32180 Wharfedale 30713 Panasonic 31641  32523  32859 Sharp 30630  30675  32869  Soundwave 30713 Windsor 30713 Philips 32084  32434  32689 Sony 31033  31070  31431   Star Clusters 31152 Windy Sam 30573 Pioneer 30142  32442 31516  31633  32180  Strato 31152 Xbox 30522  32083 Samsung 30199  33195 Sylvania 30675  Strong 30713 XLogic 31152 Sharp 32250  32474  32652 Targa 30741  Supervision 31152 Sherwood 33052 Toshiba 31639  32277  32551                17             y    Ae                                                                                                                                                                                      DVD R TV DVD Combination  Victor 31597 Magnavox 12372  Yamaha 30646 Matsui 11037  30713  Zenith 30741 Medion 12719  Nordmende 12001  HD DVD O
56.  When you connect a pair of headphones  the listening mode  is set to Stereo  unless it s already set to Stereo  Mono   Direct  or Pure Audio      If you connect an iPod or iPhone to the USB port on the AV  receiver  no sound will be output from the headphones jack     On screen Setup    With the AV receiver connected to a TV  there are two  ways of changing the settings on screen  using the Quick  Setup or the Setup menu  HOME      E Quick Setup   The Quick Setup provides quick access to frequently used  settings  You can change settings and view the current  information     E Setup menu  HOME    The Setup menu  HOME  provides a convenient way to  change the AV receiver s various settings  Settings are  organized into 9 categories     The on screen menus appear only on a TV that is  connected to HDMI OUT MAIN  If your TV is  connected to other video outputs  use the AV  receiver s display when changing settings     This section describes the procedure for using the  remote controller unless otherwise specified        Using the Quick Setup    RECEIVER  DISPLAY SOURCE    REMOTE MODE INPUT SELECTOR         c    RECEIVER    ENTER         4        SPIGUIDE    PLAYLIST PLAYLIST    Q SETUP RETURN           RETURN    HOME       1 Press RECEIVER followed by Q SETUP   The Quick Setup will be superimposed on the TV  screen     2 Use A V and ENTER to make the desired selection     Press Q SETUP to close the menu   Press RETURN to return to the previous menu     Explanatory Notes        
57.  and logging in  with your email and password    Tip   If you want to use multiple user accounts  see    Using    Multiple Accounts      gt  page 1   Login can be made from  the    Users    screen     2 To play a station  use A V to select the station from    your station list  and then press ENTER    Playback starts and the playback screen appears   Create a New Station    Enter the name of a song  artist  or genre and Pandora  will create a unique radio station for you based on the  musical qualities of that song  artist  or genre     E Menu Items   I like this song    Give a song    thumbs up    and Pandora will play more  music like it    I don   t like this song    Give a song    thumbs down    and Pandora will ban that  song from the current station    Why is this song playing     Discover some of the musical attributes that Pandora  uses to create your personal radio stations    Don   t play the song for a month    Tf you are tired of a song  you can put the song to sleep  and Pandora will not play it for one month    Create station from this artist    Creates a radio station from this artist     A En2 V    Using Internet Radio    Delete this station    This will permanently delete a station from your  Pandora account  All of your thumbs feedback will be  lost should you choose to re create the station with the  same song or artist    Create station from this song    Creates a radio station from this song    Rename this station    Lets you rename the current radio stat
58.  appears     Enabled buttons   gt  gt   Bl   gt  gt        B Menu Items   I Love this track    Track information is saved in Last fm server  and  playback frequency increases    Ban this track    Track information is saved in Last fm server  and  playback frequency reduces    Add to My Favorites    Adds a station to My Favorites list     B Using scrobbling control  Use A F to select    Enable     and then press ENTER     Internet radio services provided by a third party may be    terminated with or without notice   Internet radio services may not be available in some areas     Internetradio verwenden    Internetradio verwenden Verwendung mehrerer Konten    Der AV Receiver unterst  tzt mehrere Nutzerkonten  was  bedeutet  dass Sie frei zwischen mehreren Logins  umschalten k  nnen  Nach der Anmeldung der  Nutzerkonten wird das Login vom    Users    Bildschirm  aus vorgenommen     1 Dr  cken Sie MENU w  hrend der Bildschirm des  Nutzers angezeigt wird   Das folgende Men   erscheint   Add new user   Remove this user   Sie k  nnen entweder ein neues Nutzerkonto  abspeichern oder ein bestehendes l  schen     Verwendung von Last fm Internet Radio       2    Allgemeine Verfahren bei den    Internetradio Men  s       Anmerkung      Die verf  gbaren Dienste sind l  nderabh  ngig verschieden     1 Dr  cken Sie NET   Es erscheint eine Liste der Netzwerkdienste und die  NET Anzeige leuchtet  Wenn sie blinkt    berpr  fen  Sie ob das Ethernet Kabel fest im AV Receiver  eingesteckt ist     
59.  assigned to an input selector in     HDMI Input    page 53   the same HDMI IN will be set as  a priority in this assignment  In this case  if you want to use the  coaxial or optical audio input  make the appropriate selection in  the    Audio Selector    page 64       Supported sampling rates for PCM signals  stereo mono  from a  digital input  optical and coaxial  are 32 44 1 48 88 2 96 kHz 16   20  24 bit    e    AUX    is fixed to the                option     5       Speaker Setup    A    f p    Pe  51 E  Setup  27                  Speaker Setup    Some of the settings in this section are set automatically  by Audyssey 2EQ   Room Correction and Speaker Setup    gt  page 35         Here you can check the settings made by Audyssey 2EQ  Room Correction and Speaker Setup function  or set them  manually  which is useful if you change one of the  connected speakers after using Audyssey 2EQ Room  Correction and Speaker Setup function     Speaker Settings       If you change these settings  you must run  Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup  again   gt  page 35      If the impedance of any speaker is 4 ohms or more but less  than 6  set the minimum speaker impedance to 4 ohms    If you bi amp the front speakers  you must change the     Speakers Type Front     setting  For details on speaker  wire connection  see    Bi amping the Front Speakers         gt  page 14    Note      When bi amping is used  the AV receiver is able to drive up to 5 1  speakers in the main room 
60.  buttons  38      DIMMER button  46    DISPLAY button  46     9 MUTING button  47    VOL A Y button  23      RETURN button    3 HOME button  45     3 SLEEP button  46     E Controlling the tuner    To control the AV receiver s tuner  press TUNER  or  RECEIVER    You can select AM or FM by pressing TUNER repeatedly     O A V buttons  32       D TUN button  32      DISPLAY button      CH     button  32      Number buttons  32        En i1 V    Safety Information and Introduction    Connecting the AV  Receiver    Connecting Your Speakers    Speaker Configuration    The following table indicates the channels you should use  depending on the number of speakers that you have    No matter how many speakers you use  a powered  subwoofer is recommended for a really powerful and solid  bass    To get the best from your surround sound system  you need  to set the speaker settings automatically   gt  page 35  or  manually   gt  page 55                              Number of 2 3 4516 777889919 10 11  speakers   Front speakers vv vv                              Center speaker      vvvvvvvvvvv v  Surround vvvvvvvvvvvviv  speakers   Surround back v vv v  speaker 1 2   Surround back v vv v  speakers 2   Front high       w  vv wv  speakers 2   Front wide Vi    vvv v  speakers 2                                                     1 If you re using only one surround back speaker  connect it to  the SURR BACK L terminals     2 Front high  surround back and front wide speakers cannot be  used at t
61.  can rename the stations saved in    My Favorites         gt  page 28      Adding to vTuner Internet Radio s Favorites  Select    vTuner Internet Radio    and press ENTER to  display the    Favorites    folder that appears on the same  screen as    Stations By Genre        Stations By  Location     etc  This is where your favorite Internet radio  bookmarks will be stored     To register your favorite stations using a personal  computer  you need to connect your PC to the same  network as the AV receiver  Enter ID   MAC address   of your unit on the http   onkyo vtuner com   You can  then register your favorite radio programs  The ID  is  shown at the bottom of the    vTuner Internet Radio     top menu  and the AV receiver   s MAC address is shown  on    Network    of the Setup menu   gt  page 68         A En27 V    Turning On  amp  Basic Operations    Turning On  amp  Basic Operations    Registering Other Internet Radio 5 Click    Save    to save the Internet radio station  Changing the Icon Layout on the  The Internet radio station is then added to    My Network Service Screen  Favorites     To play the registered station  press NET     and then select    My Favorites    on the network The layout of icons can be customized by switching their  service screen     list of registered Internet radio positions on the network service screen   stations appears  Select the one that you saved and       You need to connect the AV receiver to your home  network   gt  page 96   The on sc
62.  current account  and log in again on the  Users  screen           Ent V    Using Internet Radio    Pandora  internet radio  Getting Started     US ONY  nennen 2  Using Rhapsody  U S  only                            3  Using the SiriusXM Internet Radio  North   American Only     4  Using Last fm Internet Radio                          5  Using Slacker Personal Radio                        6  Using MPSTUNOS isiingie 7    Pandora   internet radio     Getting Started  U S  only     Pandora is a free  personalized Internet radio service that  plays the music you know and helps you discover music  you ll love     1 Use A V to select    I have a Pandora Account    or        new to Pandora    and then press ENTER   If you are new to Pandora select    I   m new to  Pandora     You will see an activation code on your  TV screen  Please write down this code  Go to an  Internet connected computer and point your browser  to www pandora com onkyo  Enter your activation code and then follow the  instructions to create your Pandora account and your  personalized Pandora Internet radio stations  You can  create your stations by entering your favorite songs  and artists when prompted  After you have created  your account and stations you can return to your  Onkyo receiver and press enter to begin listening to  your personalized Pandora Internet radio   If you have an existing Pandora account  you can add  your Pandora account to your Onkyo receiver by  selecting    I have a Pandora Account   
63.  have an account  select    Access  without Sign In    and press ENTER to use a  restricted version of the service   Note that use will be restricted    Tip    If you want to use multiple user accounts  see    Using    Multiple Accounts      gt  page 1   Login can be made from  the    Users    screen     Use A V to select a menu item and then press  ENTER    To sign out  use       to select    Sign out    from this  screen and then press ENTER    Use A Y to select a station and then press ENTER  or     to start playback from the station    The playback screen appears     6 You can control the tracks with the buttons on the    remote control   Enabled buttons   gt  gt   11  W   gt  gt     E Menu Items   Rate Song as Favorite    Stores information to server  making it more likely  that the song will be played again    Ban Song    Stores information to server  making it less likely that  the song will be played again    Ban Artist    Stores information to server  making it less likely that  the songs from this artist will be played again    Mark Favorite    Adds the currently playing station to your favorites   Unmark Favorite    Deletes the currently playing station from your  favorites    Add song to Library    Adds the currently playing track to your library   Delete song from Library    Deletes the currently playing track from your library   Add to My Favorites    Adds a station or song to My Favorites list        Ene Y    Using Internet Radio    Using MP3tunes    Listen to 
64.  kHz bandwidth      Linear Optimum Gain Volume Circuitry     H C P S   High Current Power Supply  Massive High  Power Transformer      3 Stage Inverted Darlington Amplifier Design    Processing      THX Select2 Plus Certified     Incorporates Qdeo    technology for HDMI Video  Upscaling  to 4K Compatible      HDMI  Audio Return Channel  3D  DeepColor   x v Color  Lip Sync  DTS HD Master Audio  DTS HD  High Resolution Audio  Dolby TrueHD  Dolby Digital  Plus  DSD and Multi CH PCM      Dolby TrueHD and DTS HD Master Audio     Dolby Pro Logic IIz and Audyssey DSX       Non Scaling Configuration     A Form Listening Mode Memory     Direct Mode     Pure Audio Mode     Music Optimizer for Compressed Digital Music files     192 kHz 24 bit D A Converters     Powerful and Highly Accurate 32 bit Processing DSP     Jitter Cleaning Circuit Technology    Connections      8 HDMI Inputs  1 on front panel  and 2 Outputs    Onkyo f31HID for System Control     5 Digital Inputs  2 Optical 3 Coaxial      Component Video Switching  2 Inputs 1 Output     Banana Plug Compatible Speaker Posts       n Europe  using banana plugs to connect speakers to an audio  amplifier is prohibited       Powered Zone 2 3     Bi Amping Capability for FL FR with FHL FHR     Analog RGB Video Input  D sub 15  for PC      Internet Radio Connectivity     Network Capability for Streaming Audio Files     2 USB Inputs  Front Rear  for Memory Devices and  iPod   iPhone   models  Enables Display of Album  Artwork       Only t
65.  le nombre de jours restants dans votre essai  Une fois la  p  riode d essai expir  e  si vous souhaitez continuer       couter le service  vous devez vous abonner  Pour vous  inscrire  acc  dez    l adresse  www siriusxm com internetradio    l aide de votre  ordinateur     Lorsque vous vous inscrivez  vous devez fournir un nom  est un mot de passe utilisateur qui doivent   tre saisis dans  l ampli tuner AV     Pour utiliser SiriusXM Internet Radio  l ampli tuner AV  doit   tre connect      Internet  Suivez les   tapes ci dessous     l aide de la t  l  commande      1 Utilisez A Y pour s  lectionner    Sign In     puis  appuyez sur ENTER   Si vous poss  dez d  j   un compte SIRIUS  vous  pouvez y acc  der en s  lectionnant    Sign In      Saisissez votre nom utilisateur et votre mot de passe  dans l   cran clavier suivant ou dans Configuration  Web  Si vous ne connaissez pas votre nom  d utilisateur ou votre mot de passe  appelez Sirius XM  au  888  539 7474 pour obtenir une assistance     Conseil      Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes utilisateur   consultez    Utilisation de plusieurs comptes      page 1    L identification peut   tre r  alis  e    partir de l   cran     Users        B Utilisation de l   cran clavier    1  Utilisez A     lt    gt  et ENTER pour saisir votre  nom d utilisateur et votre mot de passe    2  S  lectionnez    OK       3  Appuyez sur ENTER  L   cran    Confirm your  entries    s affiche    4  Appuyez sur ENTER       Please wait       s 
66.  lt  gt   Mono Multiplex Source Last Valid  2ch Source Last Valid  Dolby D Dolby D Plus TrueHD Last Valid  DTS DTS ES DTS HD Last Valid  Other Multich Source Last Valid  Default listening mode for analog and PCM sources   Ly To be continued    2 Use A V to select the signal format that you want to  set  and then use  lt   gt  to select a listening mode   Only listening modes that can be used with each input  signal format can be selected   gt  pages 38 to 44    The    Last Valid    option means that the listening  mode selected last will be used    The    Straight Decode    option means that straight  decoding listening mode  Dolby Digital  DTS  etc   is  selected     Note      For the    TUNER    input selector  only    Analog    will be  available      For the    NET    or    USB    input selector  only    Digital     will be available     E Analog PCM Digital  With this setting  you can specify the listening mode  used when an analog  CD  TV  LD  VHS  MD  turntable   radio  cassette  cable  satellite  etc   or PCM digital  CD   DVD  etc   audio signal is played     Note    For the    AUX    input selector  only    PCM    is available     B Mono Multiplex Source  With this setting  you can specify the listening mode  used when a mono digital audio signal is played  DVD   etc       B 2ch Source  With this setting  you can specify the listening mode  used when 2 channel  2 0  stereo digital sources  such as  Dolby Digital or DTS  are played     E Dolby D Dolby D Plus TrueHD  
67.  mentioned procedure  set your Blu   ray Disc DVD player s HDMI audio settings to PCM     B Audio Return Channel  ARC  function  The Audio Return Channel  ARC  function enables an  HDMI capable TV to send the audio stream to HDMI OUT  MAIN on the AV receiver     This function can be used when        Your TV is ARC capable  and       The TV CD input selector is selected  and          HDMI Control RIHD     is set to  On   page 67   and          Audio Return Channel    is set to    Auto      gt  page 67      B MHL  Mobile High Definition Link   With its support for MHL  Mobile High Definition Link      the AUX  Front  input allows you to deliver high   definition video from a connected mobile device     Ae        Connecting Your Components    The on screen menus appear only on a TV that is connected to HDMI OUT MAIN  If your TV is connected to other    video outputs  use the AV receiver   s display when changing settings                           ASSIGNABLE    GND screw                      A En 17 Y    Connections    Connect your components to the appropriate jacks  The  default input assignments are shown below  See     Connection Tips and Video Signal Path    for more  information   gt  page 90         Assignment can be changed   gt  page 54                        No    Jack Port Components   1   USB  VIDEO   iPod iPhone  video  playback    2   USB  3 iPod iPhone  MP3 player        USB flash drive              3   DIGITAL IN  COAXIAL 1  BD DVD   Blu ray Disc DVD player  W    
68.  model s Play  button  Remote operation should then be possible     Try resetting your iPod iPhone         Depending on your iPod iPhone  some buttons may       not work as expected        Ens3       Appendix    E The AV receiver unexpectedly selects my  iPod iPhone as the input source       Always pause iPod iPhone playback before selecting      a different input source  If playback is not paused  the  Direct Change function may select your iPod iPhone   as the input source by mistake during the transition  between tracks     E iPod iPhone doesn t work properly       Try reconnecting your iPod iPhone       Bi There s no sound       Only components connected to analog inputs can be      played in Zone 2 3     Bi The Zone 2 3 speakers produce no sound       If the  Speakers Type Front   setting is set to other 55  than    Normal     Powered Zone 2 3 cannot be used     Music Server and Internet Radio    Bi Can t access the server or Internet radio       Check the network connection between the AV 96  receiver and your router or switch     Make sure that your modem and router are properly       connected  and make sure they are both turned on     Make sure the server is up and running and 97  compatible with the AV receiver   Check the    Network    settings  68    B Playback stops while listening to music files on  the server       Make sure your server is compatible with the AV 97  receiver     Ae           If you download or copy large files on your      computer  playback ma
69.  operation for a specific time  three minutes by  default   a screen saver automatically comes on     Tip     The time until the screen saver activates itself can be changed  in the  Screen Saver  setting   page 66       The screen will return to its previous state if the AV receiver is  operated                51       Advanced Operations    Explanatory Notes    Speaker Setup           Speaker Configuration     9   8 Subwoofer     No     Main Menu      Sub Menu       Setting target    Setting options  default setting underlined     1 Input Output Assign    RANS     r       E          Sub Menu    Main Menu       About the HYBRID STANDBY Indicator    By way of optimized circuitry  this function reduces power  consumption when the AV receiver is in standby mode   The HYBRID STANDBY indicator will light in either of  the following conditions       HDMI Through  is enabled  the HDMI indicator is  off          Network Standby    is enabled  the NET indicator is  off      HYBRID STANDBY          Note      If Zones are turned on or  if a mobile device connected to the  Front Input  MHL  is charging  the HYBRID STANDBY  indicator won   t light     Setup Menu Items    Advanced Operations       Main menu item    Sub menu item          Main menu item    Sub menu item             Input Output Assign    gt  page 53     Monitor Out       HDMI Input       Component Video Input       Digital Audio Input       Speaker Setup    gt  page 55     Speaker Settings                      Speaker Conf
70.  optimum crossover frequencies  If you set up your  speakers using Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and            55 V    Advanced Operations    Speaker Setup  please make sure manually that any THX  speakers are set to    S0Hz THX     crossover     B Subwoofer     Yes   gt No    E Front   gt  Full Band   gt  40Hz to 80Hz THX  to 100Hz  120Hz  150Hz  200Hz    Note      If the    Subwoofer    setting is set to    No     the  Front  setting is  fixed at    Full Band        E Centeri  Surround i2     Full Band   gt  40Hz to 80Hz THX  to 100Hz  120Hz  150Hz  200Hz   gt  None       Front Wide 1 3 4  Front High 1 3 5 6     Full Band   gt  40Hz to 80Hz THX  to 100Hz  120Hz  150Hz  200Hz     None    E Surround Back    5 5     Full Band   gt  40Hz to 80Hz THX  to 100Hz  120Hz  150Hz  200Hz   gt  None    Note     1    Full Band    can be selected only when    Full Band    is  selected in the    Front    setting     2 When the    Powered Zone 3    setting is set to    Yes    and  Zone 3 is turned on  this setting cannot be selected     3 If the    Surround    setting is set to    None     this setting cannot  be selected     4 Tf the  Speakers Type Front   setting is set to    Bi Amp     or  the    Powered Zone 2    setting is set to    Yes     this setting  cannot be selected     5 If the  Speakers Type Front     setting is set to    Bi Amp     or  the    Powered Zone 2    setting is set to    Yes    together with  Zone 2 turned on  this setting cannot be selected     5        6 When the 
71.  placed on the apparatus    Don t put candles or other burning objects on top of   this unit    Batteries   Always consider the environmental issues and follow   local regulations when disposing of batteries    If you install the apparatus in a built in installation    such as a bookcase or rack  ensure that there is   adequate ventilation    Leave 20 cm  8   of free space at the top and sides and   10 cm  4   at the rear  The rear edge of the shelf or   board above the apparatus shall be set 10 cm  4   away   from the rear panel or wall  creating a flue like gap for  warm air to escape     Precautions    1  Recording Copyright   Unless it s for personal use  only  recording copyrighted material is illegal without  the permission of the copyright holder    2  AC Fuse    The AC fuse inside the unit is not user   serviceable  If you cannot turn on the unit  contact your  Onkyo dealer    3  Care   Occasionally you should dust the unit all over  with a soft cloth  For stubborn stains  use a soft cloth  dampened with a weak solution of mild detergent and  water  Dry the unit immediately afterwards with a  clean cloth  Don t use abrasive cloths  thinners   alcohol  or other chemical solvents  because they may  damage the finish or remove the panel lettering    4  Power  WARNING  BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE  FIRST TIME  READ THE FOLLOWING SECTION  CAREFULLY    AC outlet voltages vary from country to country  Make  sure that the voltage in your area meets the voltage  require
72.  ray Disc DVD player       Game console    c                Set top box digital video recorder  etc       If your TV doesn t support Audio Return Channel  ARC   you Connect your components to the appropriate jacks  The  need to connect an optical digital cable together with the HDMI default input assignments are shown below     cable to the AV receiver      Assignment can be changed   gt  page 53      When listening to an HDMI component through the AV                                              receiver  set the HDMI component so that its video can be seen Jack Components  on the TV screen  on the TV  select the input of the HDMI INI Blu ray Disc DVD player v  component connected to the AV receiver   If the TV power is off IN2 Satellite cable set top box  etc  v  Te ante MT Spann menden Y  IN4 Game console v  INS Personal computer v  IN6 Other components v  IN7 Other components v  Front Camcorder  etc   OUT MAIN  TV  OUT SUB Projector  etc   See also          Connection Tips and Video Signal Path      gt  page 90         Using an RIHD compatible TV  Player  or Recorder       gt  page 93         About HDMI      gt  page 95             16 Y    Connections    AUK INPUT  KOMM    Camcorder  etc        Tip     To listen to the audio of a component connected via HDMI  through your TV   s speakers  enable    HDMI Through       gt  page 67  and set the AV receiver to standby mode     Note       n the case of Blu ray Disc DVD players  if no sound is output  despite following the above
73.  remote controller  1 Press ZONE2 or ZONES     2 UseVOL A Y     E Operating on the AV receiver    Press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3  the Z2 Z3 indicator on  the display flashes      2 Use MASTER VOLUME control within 8 seconds     If your Zone 2 3 speakers are connected to a receiver or  integrated amplifier in Zone 2 3  use its volume control to  adjust the volume     5       Muting Zones    Bi Operating on the remote controller    1 Press ZONE2 or ZONES  and then press MUTING     Tip    To unmute  press ZONE2 or ZONES followed by MUTING  again  Zones can also be unmuted by adjusting the volume     Note      Only analog input sources are output by the ZONE 2 3 LINE  OUT  FRONT WIDE ZONE 2 L R and FRONT  HIGH ZONE 3 L R terminals  Digital input sources are not  output  If no sound is heard when an input source is selected   verify that the source is connected to an analog input      You cannot select different AM or FM radio stations for your  main room and Zone 2 3  The same AM FM radio station will be  heard in each room  Namely  if you have selected an FM station  for the main room  that station will also be output in Zone 2 3      When you have selected NET or USB as input selector  the last  selector selected will be set for Main room and Zone 2 3      When Zone 2 3 is activated and its input selector is selected  the  power consumption of standby mode slightly increases      While Zone 2 3 is on  RI functions will not work      When setting the AV receiver to standby mode while Zo
74.  same time      Enter the appropriate remote control code before using the  remote controller for the first time   page 77      Selecting Speaker Layout    You can set which speakers you want to use by priority     1 Press RECEIVER followed by SP  speaker layout   repeatedly to select       Speaker Layout FH   The sound from front high speakers is output by  priority       Speaker Layout FW   The sound from front wide speakers is output by  priority       Speaker Layout SB   The sound from surround back speakers is  output by priority     Note      This setting is not available in either of the following cases       The    Speakers Type Front     setting is set to    Bi Amp           The    Powered Zone 2 3    setting is set to    Yes    and Zone 2 3  is turned on    Playback conditions may be limited depending on the settings in      Speaker Settings      gt  page 55  and      Speaker Configuration   gt  page 55     When a listening mode which doesn   t support front high  front   wide or surround back speakers is used  this setting cannot be   selected     Using the Whole House Mode    The Whole House Mode is useful when you want to add  extra background music to your home party  this allows  you to enjoy the same stereo music as the main room in  separate rooms  Zone 2 3     The Whole House Mode selects the same input source for  Multi Zone as the main room s    See also       Speaker Setup      gt  page 55         Multi Zone      gt  page 70     1 While holding down ZONE 
75.  settings have no effect      If    Audyssey    is enabled  it prevails over this setting    gt  page 60      THX Audio Setup    E Surr Back Speaker Spacing       lt 1ft   lt 0 3m     gt  1ft 4ft  0 3m 1 2m     gt   gt 4ft   gt 1 2m   You can specify the distance between your surround back  speakers     Note      This setting is not available in any of the following cases        Surround Back  is set to    None      page 55           Surround Back Ch  is set to    Ich      gt  page 56         Powered Zone 2 3    is set to    Yes      gt  page 55  and Zone  2 3 is turned on   gt  page 71      E THX Ultra2 Select2 Subwoofer   gt No   gt  Yes  If you   re using a THX certified subwoofer  set this setting  to    Yes      Note      If the    Subwoofer    setting is set to    No     this setting cannot be  selected   gt  page 55         En 57       Advanced Operations    E BGC      Off    gt On  You can apply THX   s Boundary Gain Compensation   BGC  to compensate the perceived exaggeration of low  frequencies for listeners sitting very close to a room  boundary  i e   wall      Note      This setting is only available if    THX Ultra2 Select2  Subwoofer    is set to    Yes         If the    Subwoofer    setting is set to    No     this setting cannot be  selected   gt  page 55      E Loudness Plus      Off    gt On  When the    Loudness Plus    setting is set to    On     it is  possible to enjoy even subtle nuances of audio expression  at low volume  This is only available when t
76.  stunning surround sound     E Explanatory Notes                    D Q Front speakers    8 Center speaker        Surround speakers       Subwoofer s       8 Surround back speakers  O   Front high speakers     O Front wide speakers    MENU    SP  speaker layout     SPIGUIDE PREV CH  PLAYLIST PLAYLIST         RETURN    buttons       Input Source  The following audio formats are supported by the listening    Speaker Layout   The illustration shows which speakers are activated in each  channel  See    Speaker Configuration    for the speaker  setup   gt  page 55          2 1                  e  8    This is mono  monophonic  sound        STEREO    This is stereo  stereophonic  sound  Two  independent audio signal channels are reproduced  through two speakers              This is 5 1 channel surround sound  This surround  system has five main channels of sound and a sixth  subwoofer channel  called the point one channel      5 1ch       This is 7 1 channel surround sound  This is a  further sound enhancement to 5 1 channel sound  with two additional speakers that provide greater  sound envelopment and more accurate positioning  of sounds     7 1ch                DTS E This is DTS ES surround sound  This surround  system can produce a discrete or a matrix encoded  sixth channel from existing DTS 5 1 encoded    material        H  m  x e    This is Dolby Digital EX surround sound  This  provides a center back surround channel from 5 1   channel sources              En39 Y    Turning
77.  utrustningens modell och   rg  ng  g  r det inte att garantera kompatibilitet      P   vissa modeller kan det h  nda att fj  rrkontrollen inte fungerar eller s   kan dess kompatibilitet  vara begr  nsad till en del av utrustningens funktion      Dessutom gar det inte att l  gga till nya koder till fj  rrkontrollens existerande f  rvalda kanaler      Aven om erh  llna fj  rrkontrollkoder   r korrekta vid tryckningen  kan de   ndras av tillverkaren     EIRE    1    HERBE REMOTE MODE  81820              TEE    DISPLAY    87     3H  e   REMOTE MODE  PARR              8508         Integra RIEME ERAR o PA  gt   Remote Modes EPIR    PEER  Display  HET           ER       RECEIER   BIER  FIZ 155822                                 TV  CERDO HE EEE          ER  RECEIVER   BEINEN   gt   TV  CE  PIG WEEE   gt   GO E HE  REMOTE MODE  CEP AEREA EEE  gt          EEE APE      A STE  SHE  gt  N  E Ria                   REMOTE MODE  8            gt  AIR  BRE CD         CD ARE  gt  HARAN IRA  TV CD        E 30 BA  gt                       5 MEA RA  gt    REMOTE MODE  PARN  PEL  PET            Tr E AREE EVE A SERE  gt  REMOTE MODE  ERSTE  JASH   EPS   fer         PEK     ER             AV BEE ENTSTEHT      TIEREN TREE TERRA AEA A a a AnS       FT BA ea NANTERRE      EE  apa EH                           EA MEG BL      gt             BIE      RARA ME   AMARA AENA  gt    ERRE AEREA  gt  RH PERS AB IE        RIL EN RETTEN TECH                      PERSE CEA           PRENE      0 T BE SHEET EMEN    
78.  wizard goes to    Terminating the  Initial Setup      Terminating the Initial Setup    This step ends the initial setup process     1 Press ENTER     To restart the initial setup  select    Initial Setup    in  the    Hardware Setup    menu   gt  page 69      Playback    The on screen information appears only on a TV that  is connected to HDMI outputs  If your TV is  connected to other video outputs  use the AV  receiver   s display when changing settings     This section describes the procedure for using the  remote controller  unless otherwise specified     Playing the Connected Component    E Operating with the remote controller    RECEIVER    RECEIVER  VOL A V       ENTER       2     Listening mode buttons    1 Press RECEIVER followed by an INPUT  SELECTOR button     2 Start playback on the source component   See also        Playing an iPod iPhone via USB      gt  page 25        Playing a USB Device      gt  page 26        Listening to vTuner Internet Radio      gt  page 27      Registering Other Internet Radio      gt  page 28      Playing Music Files on a Server    page 29        Remote Playback    gt  page 29      Playing Music Files on a Shared Folder    2 page 30      Listening to AM FM Radio    page 31      Playing Audio and Video from Separate Sources     gt  page 34       Pod iPhone Playback via Onkyo Dock      2 page 73      Controlling Other Components    page 75        To adjust the volume  use VOL A V        En23 V    Turning On  amp  Basic Operations    4 Se
79. 0037  10668  11037    Technisson 10714  11652  Rectiligne 10037 12719 Starlite  0047              11585  Redstar 10037 SEI 10037 Strato 10037             A    14          y    de    Remote Control Codes                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Television Television Television VCR  Technosonic 10556  10625  10499  Toyoda 11709 VU 11365  12098 Humax 20739  11324 TRANS continents    10556  10037  10668  Walker 11667 Panasonic 20614  20616  Techvision 11709 11037 Waltham 10037  10668  11037 Philips 20739  Techwood 11037  11667 Transonic 10037  10698  10512  Wansa 12098 ReplayTV 20614  20616  Tecnimagen 10556 11363 Wards 10178 Sonic Blue 20614  20616  Teco 10178  10653 Triad 10336 Watson 10037  10714  10668  Sony 20636  Tedelex 10208  11709 Trio 11248 11037 TiVo 20636  20739  Teknika 10150 Triumph 10556  10037 Wega 10037  TELE System 11585 TVTEXT 95 10556 Welltech 10714  11652 PVR  Telecor 10037 Uher 10037 Weltstar 11037 DirecTV 20739  Telefunken 10037  10625  10714  Ultravox 10037 Westinghouse 11755 Go Video 20614  10560  10698  11585  UMC 11614  11775 Wharfedale 10556  10037  11324  Humax 20739     Unic Line 10037 11667 Panasonic 20614  20616  Telefusion 10037 Uniden 12122 White Westinghouse  10037
80. 12      7 Humax 11295 Kendo 10037  11037  11585  Finlandia 10208 Graetz 10714 Hypson 10556  10037  10714  Kennex 11037  Finlux 10556  10037  10714  Granada 10037  10560  10208 10668  11037  10715 Kioto 10556  10715  11248  11667   Hyundai 11037  10698 Kiton 10037  10668  er Grandin 10556  10037  10714   Firstline 10556  10037  10714  Iberia 10037 KLL 10037  10668  11037  10208 10668  11037 10715   11363        11652        10037 Kneissel 10556  10037  10499  Fisher 10208 Grundig s 10037  FA iLo 11394 Koenig 10037  in i 11223  11667  12625 Imperial 10037 Kolin 10150  10037  11610   GVA 11363  12098 i 11755  F     10037 Indiana 10037  SERM H amp B 12001 Kolster 10037  Frab 10037 Ingelen 10714  dois Haier 10037  10698  10508              10037  10714    Inno Hit 11037  11585  Friac 10037  10499  Hallmark 10178 Korpel 10037  Fuiicom 11709 Innova 10037 TP    A 1809 Hankook 10178 Insignia 10171  11423  11564  Kosmos 10037     Hanseatic 10556  10037  10625  12049 Kunlun 10208  EA 10803  11248  11666 10714  10634  10499  Integra 11807  13100  13500 L amp S Electronic 10714  Funar 10171  10714  10668  12001 Interbuy 10037 Lavic 11363  11037  11394  11666  Hantarex 10037  11817  13817 Interfunk 10037  10512 Lavis 11037    Hantor 10037  G Hanz 11363 Internal 10556 Lecson 10037  Harwood 10037 2   Gaba 11037    10037 Intervision 10037 Lenco 10037  11037    auppauge Irradio 10037 Leyco 10037  Galaxi 10037 HB 11324  REEE 10037 IRT 10698 LG 10178  10556  10037   G 003 HCM 10037  Gateway 1175
81. 176 01409  02527  ADB 02254  02769 Arnion 01300 Clatronic 01413 Eco Star 01413  Aon 02769 ASCI 01334 Clayton 01626 Edision 01631  Apple 02615 AssCom 00853 Com Hem 01176  01915 Elap 01413  01567  AT amp T 00858 Astro 00173  01100 Dnus 01413 Elbe 02418  BT Vision 02294 Atlanta 02418 Comsat 01413 Energy Sistem 01631  02418  Canal  02657 Atsat 01300 Coship 01457 Engel 01251  Cisco 00858  02345  02378 AtSky 01334 Crown 01284 EuroLine 01251  Kreatel 01385 Audiola 02418 CS 01631 Europhon 01334  mio TV 02802 Aurora 00879  00642  01433 Cyfra  01409 Europsat 01413 01611  Motorola 01376  00858  01998  Austar 00879  00642  01259 Cyfrowy Polsat 00853  02527 Expressvu 00775  02378 Avanit 01631 D box 00723  01114 Fagor 01611  Neuf TV 03107 Awa 02418 Dantax 01626 Ferguson 01291  Pace 02657 Axil 01413  01457  02418 Denver 02418 Finlux 01626  Philips 02294 Axitronic 01626 Dgtec 01242  01631  02418 Fly Com 01457  Scientific Atlanta 00858  02345 Balmet 01457 Dick Smith 02418 FMD 01413  01457  SFR 03107 Bell Express Vu 00775 Electronics Foxtel 00879  01176  01356  SingTel 01998  02802 Belson 02418 Digi Raum Electronics  01176 Freesat 02408  TeliaSonera 01385 Big Sat 01457 Digiality 01334 Fuba 00173  01251  Telus 02345 Black Diamond 01284 Digifusion 01645 Galaxis 00853  00879  Thomson 02769 Blaupunkt 00173 Digihome 01284 General Satellite 01176  Verizon 02378 Boshmann 01413  01631 DigiLogic 01284 Globo 01251  01334  01626  Boston 01251 DigiQuest 01300  01457  01631 GOI 00775  SSIS IE Boxer 01458 D
82. 187 BT Vision 02294  02345  02378 Pioneer 01877  01500 Cisco 01877  01982          02657                00817  00660  01666  RCN 01376 Comcast 01376  01877  01982  Cisco 00858  02345  02378  02015  02447 Rogers 01877 02187 Kreatel 01385  Comcast 01376  01877  01982  Sagem 00817 Cox 01376  01877 mio TV 02802         PINE 01877  01060  01666   PE 02187 Motorola 01376  00858  01998  Cox 01376  01877 02015  02774 A 01482 0205 s    Daeryung 01877 Scientific Atlanta 01877  00858  01982  Humax 02142  03051  03053 Neuf TV 03107    02345   a  Digeo 02187 Insight 01376  01877 Pace 02657  DX Antenna 01500 SFR 03107 J COM 03051  03053 32213  Shaw 01376    gt  Scientific Atlanta 00858  02345  France Telecom 00817   Knology 01877 SFR 03107  Freebox 01482 ingTel 01998  02802      Mediacom 01376  01877 SingTel 01998  02802  Fujitsu 01497 Sony        Motorola 01376     Stofa 02015 TeliaSonera 01385  Humax 00660  02142  02447  Moxi 02187    oxi Telus 02345  03051  03053 Suddenlink 01376  01877      Numericable 02767 Thomson 02769  Insight 01376  01877 Sumitomo 01500  Pace 01877 Verizon 02378  J COM 03051  03053 Telewest 01068    Tans 01385 Panasonic 01982  Knology      Tae      02345 Philips 01582  02767 IPTV PVR Combination  Kreatel    S 2 2  Pioneer 01877 ADB 02769  Macab      a           Rogers 01877 Aon 02769  Mediacom 01376  01877 Time Warner 01376  01877  02187                         y    de    Remote Control Codes                                                                         
83. 2  press ZONE 3 on the  front panel   To cancel the Whole House Mode  change the input  source for the main room or select a listening mode      gt  page 38      Note      The Whole House Mode only supports analog audio      To adjust the volume of Multi Zone  switch the AV receiver  to Multi Zone control  See    Adjusting the Volume for  Zones    page 71  for the volume adjustment of Multi  Zone      The Whole House Mode is not available in either of the  following cases        The    Audio TV Out    setting is set to    On       gt  page 67            HDMI Control RIHD   is set to    On      gt  page 67   and you re listening through your TV speakers        En47       Turning On  amp  Basic Operations    Muting the AV Receiver    You can temporarily mute the output of the AV receiver     1 Press RECEIVER followed by MUTING   The output is muted and the MUTING indicator  flashes on the AV receiver s display     Tip    To unmute  press MUTING again or adjust the volume       Muting is automatically cancelled when the AV receiver is  set to standby     Using Headphones    1 Connect a pair of stereo headphones with a  standard plug  1 4 inch or 6 3 mm  to the PHONES  jack     While the headphones plug is inserted in the PHONES  jack       indicator lights     Note      Always turn down the volume before connecting your  headphones      While the headphones plug is inserted in the PHONES  jack  the speakers are turned off   The Powered Zone 2 3  speakers are not turned off      
84. 2 Wahlen Sie den gew  nschten Service aus und  dr  cken Sie ENTER     Die oberste Seite des ausgew  hlten Services erscheint     Tipp      Einige dieser Dienstleistungen lassen keine mehrfachen  Nutzerkonten zu      Sie k  nnen bis zu 10 Nutzerkonten speichern      Um zwischen den Konten umzuschalten  m  ssen Sie sich  zuerst aus Ihrem aktuellen Konto ausloggen und sich dann  wieder auf dem   Users    Bildschirm einloggen           Dei Y         Verwendung von Last fm Internet Radio    Last fm ist ein Musikdienst  der sich Ihre  Lieblingsmusik merkt      Ihr neuer Onkyo AV Receiver ist   uBerst clever  Wenn Sie ein  kostenloses Last fm Konto eingerichtet haben  werden darin alle  k  rzlich abgespielten Titel gespeichert  Wenn Sie die Last fm   Website besuchen  k  nnen Sie Ihre pers  nlichen Charts der von  Ihnen abgespielten Musik anzeigen  teilen Sie diese mit Freunden  und sehen Sie auch  welche Musik Ihre Freunde m  gen     Mit tausenden von Biografien  Rezensionen und einer schier  endlosen Auswahl an pers  nlich angepassten  werbefreien  Radiosendern ist Last fm eine groBartige Gelegenheit  um  Musik zu entdecken  Holen Sie sich Ihr kostenloses Last fm   Konto noch heute unter www  last fm join    Nur f  r GroBbritannien und Deutschland    Holen Sie sich ein Abonnement und Sie k  nnen auch ohne  Computer die besten werbefreien Last fm Radiosender auf  Ihrem Onkyo AV Receiver h  ren    Recommended Radio    Entdecken Sie smarte  pers  nlich angepasste Empfehlungen   die s
85. 3  01223 SAB 01251  01300  01631 Skymax 01413  Kenwood 00853 Nordmende 01611 Sagem 01114 Skyplus 01175  01384  Koenig 01631 NPG 01631 Saivod 02418 PER         Kreiling 01626 Onn 01284 Samsung 01377  00853  01175  SEIN _ 01334  Kreiselmeyer 00173 Optex 01413  01611  01626 01206  01458  01662  SM Electronic 01409  L amp S Electronic 01334      PRES   02986 Smart _ 01404  01413  01631  LaSAT 00173 Orbis 01334 Sansui 01251 SmartVision 01457  Lava 01631 Orbitech 01100  01195 Sanyo 01626 Sony 00847  00853  01558   Sat Control 01300 02299                      A 2 Y          Remote Control Codes       Satellite Set Top Box    Satellite Set Top Box    SAT PVR Combination    SAT PVR Combination                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Star 00887 UBC 00642 BskyB 01175  01662 Schneider 01206  Stream System 01300 UEC 00879  01356 Bush 01645 Sedea Electronique 01206  Strong 00853  00879  01284  United 01251  01626  02418 Canal Satellite 02657 SKY 01175  01662  01693   01300  01409  01626  Unitymedia 01882 Canal  02657 01850  02754  02418 Universum 00173  01251 CanalSat 02657 SKY Deutschland  02754  Sunny 01300 Variosat 00173 Cyfrowy Polsat 02527 SKY Italia 01693  01850  ansiar 00612        02418 Digifusion 01645 SK
86. 30490  30534 Oron       Audix 30713 Emerson 30675  32213 Ormond 30713    Lenco 30713  33052  Autovox 30713 EuroLine 30675   Pacific 30713  Lexicon 32545  Awa 32587 Ferguson 30713      30741  31602 Palladium 30713  Basic Line 30713 Finlux 30741 um  n 52  Panasonic 30503  30490  31579   Bel Canto Design 31571 Firstline 30713 iod ME 31641  32523  32710   Foehn  amp  Hirsch 33052        32859  Black Diamond 30713 0539  30741  32474      Funai 30675 Loewe 3  gt   gt   gt  Pelican Accessories 30533  Blue Parade 30571 32783 Phil 30675  Blue Sky 30713 SE 30508 Logik 30713      Brandt 30503 Lumatron 30741  30713 30675  30713  31340   Bush 30713      31152 Lunatron 30741 31354  32056  32084   C Tech 31152 Go Video 30741 man 30573 32434  32689  California Audio Labs   30490 GoldStar 30741        30713 Pioneer 30571  30142  30631   Cambridge Audio 32808 Goodmans 30713  31152 Magnavox 30503  30539  30646  31571  32442  32860  Centrum 30675  30713 GPX 30741 30675  30713  31354 Polk Audio 30539  Changhong 30627 Grandin 30713 Manhattan 30713 Presidian 30675  Cinetec 30713 Grundig 30539  30713 Marantz 30539  32414  32432  ProAudio 31394  Clatronic 30675 H  amp  B 30713 33444 Proscan 30522  Clayton 30713 Haaz 31152 Mark 30713 Proson 30713  Crown 30713 Hanseatic 30741 Matsui 30713 Pye 30539  30646                      16    y            Remote Control Codes                                                                                                                                            
87. 5 Isukai 10037 10714  10715  10698   E DERI IDEE Highline 10037 ITS 10037 11423  11768  11840    gt   gt           12182  12358  12424   10560 un a 10208 ITT 10208 12834  GEC 10037 a ITT Nokia 10208 Liesenkoetter 10037          A    12          y          Ae     Remote Control Codes                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Television Television Television Television  Lifetec 10037  10714  10668  Medion 10556  10037  10714  Naiko 10037 Onix 10698  11037  12001 i      E Nakimura 10037 Onkyo 11807  13100  13500  Linsar 11585 To o National 10508  10208 Onn 11667  11709  Local India TV 10208      Mesatron 10178 NEC 10178  10653  10508  Onyx 11709  Local Malaysia TV 10698   10499  MEI 11037 Opera 10037  10714  Lodos 11037 pem 5 75 107 Neckermann 10556  10037 Optimus 10650  Loewe 10037  10512  11884 Neun   NEI 10037  11037 Orbit 10037  Logik 11037  10698          TT  NEO 11324 Orion 10556  10037  10714   Logix 10668      TTE Netsat 10037 11037  12001  Luma 11037      10037 10668  10195 NetTV 11755 Orline 10037  t  Lumatron 10037  10668             Neufunk 10556  10037  10714 Ormond 10668  11037  Lumenio 10037 MGA 10150  10178 New Tech 10556  10037 Osaki 10556  10037  Lux May 10037 Mic
88. 63  Alien 11037 Beon 10037 Clatronic 10037  10714  11324 DMTech 12001  Allstar 10037 pani 10538  10898 Clayton 11037 Domeos 10668  Amstrad 10171  10037  11037 PR 10037 Condor 10037 Drean 10037  Anam 10037 Boxe   Joss Conrowa 10698 DSE 10698  Anam National 10037  10650 nr 11037 Contec 10037 Dual 10037  11037  11585   2   O l        10037  10625              Durabrand D 10171  10714     Blue Sky      urabran         Anitech 10037 10714  10668  11037  CPTEC 10625  11363 11037  11652  Ansonic 10037  10668 10715  10499  11324 Crown 10037  10714  10668     j   11037  10715  10208        10037         10178  10625  11365 11363  11652  11709 s    gt       11817 13817  Ardem 10037  10714 Boca 11652    Dynatron 10037  Arena 10037 Boman 11324 Cyberpix 1166  Dynex 12049  Aristona 10556  10037 Bork 11363      FR 2027 Tu 0 IS  aewoo E E  gt   BEP  11037       10037  10208 10634  10499  12098 E max 11324  Att Mito 11585 Brandt 10625  10714  10560 Dansai 10037  10208 Easy Living 11666  11709         10037 Brimax        Dantax 10714  11037  10715  ECE 10037  Astra 10037 Brinkmann 10037  10668 11652 Elbe 10556  10037  ATD 10698 Brionvega 10037 Datsura 10208 Electrograph 11755  Atlantic 10037 Bush 10556  10037  10714  Dawa 10037  Audiosonic 10037  10714  10715 10668  11037  10698    11886      10208  11585  11652 Dayton Ho Elfunk 11037  Audiovox      11667 12719 0  De Graaf 10208 ELG 10037  Audioword 10698 Byd sign 12140  12209 DEC 11709 Elin 10037  Aventura        Camper 10037 Decca 10037 Elit
89. 93 Myrica 11666        11667 10556  10037  10512   Myryad 10556 Onida 10653 10605  10690  11394     Phocus 10714  11652                      A c Y       Remote Control Codes                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 Television Television Television Television  Phoenix 10037 Reflex 10037  10668  11037 Sei Sinudyne 10037 SunBriteTV 11610  Phonola 10556  10037 Relisys 11585 Serie Dorada 10178 Sungoo 11248  Pioneer 10037  10698  10512  Remotec 10171  10037 Shanghai 10208 Sunny 10037  11457  11636  12171 Reoc 10714 Sharp 10650  10818  11165  Sunstar 10037  Plantron 10037 Revox 10037 11423  11659 Sunstech 12001  Playsonic 10037  10714  10715  RFT 10037 Shintoshi 10037 Sunwood 10037    1652 Roadstar 10037  10714  10668  Shivaki 10178  10037 Supersonic 10208  Powerpoint 10037  10698 11037  10715 Siam 10037 SuperTech 10556  10037  Prinston 11037  10715 Rolson 12001  12098 Siemens 10037  10195 Supra 10178  Profitronic 10037 Rowa 10037  10698 Siera 10556  10037    10208  Proline m 10625  10634  Saba 10625  10714  10560 Silva 10037 Sie 11614  11775  Sagem 10618 Silva Schneider 10037              INS        10508  S   d 10037  10668  11037 Sil 10715 an ieee nn  11324  11585  11667  axe 1   er  11709  12001 Salora 10208  12001 SilverCrest 11037 Sym
90. B  13 v v v v v v                                            1 Available resolutions   640 x 480 60 Hz    800 x 600 60 Hz    1024 x 768 60 Hz    1280 x 1024 60 Hz      2 Supported resolutions   3840 x 2160 24 25 30 Hz    4096 x 2160 24 Hz      8 When video signals of personal computers connected to PC IN are output from HDMI OUT SUB  they may not display properly on some TVs        Supported resolutions for HDMI OUT SUB        En92 V    Using an RIHD   compatible TV  Player   or Recorder    fRIFLD  which stands for Remote Interactive over  HDMI  is the name of the system control function found on  Onkyo components  The AV receiver can be used with  CEC  Consumer Electronics Control   which allows  system control over HDMI and is part of the HDMI  standard  CEC provides interoperability between various  components  however  operation with components other  than MIHD compatible components cannot be  guaranteed     Appendix    About RIHD  Compatible Components Operations that can be performed with  fRIFLD connection    The following components                  compatible  As  of January 2012      BTV    Toshiba TV    Sharp TV    E Players Recorders    Onkyo and Integra f341IHID  compatible players    Toshiba players and recorders      Sharp players and recorders  only when used together  with Sharp TV       Models other than those mentioned above may have some  interoperability if compatible with CEC  which is part of the  HDMI Standard  but operation cannot be guaranteed     No
91. BD DVD is preprogrammed with the remote control code  for controlling a component that supports the 1 0  1   limited to some models   The component must be able to       receive remote control commands via  RIFLD and be  connected to the AV receiver via HDMI   Use the following remote control codes      32910 33101 33501 31612   Blu ray Disc DVD player with  RIFID     1 The RIHD supported by the AV receiver is the CEC system  control function of the HDMI standard     RC 836M    A En 78          Controlling Other Components    B TV operation       Available buttons                                                     INPUT  TV VOL A Y     Number  1 to 9  0         GUIDE Number  4107       a V  lt   gt      DISPLAY  ENTER MUTING   4    SETUP    CH             I       lt a   gt      02  PREV       tu   gt  gt   43 RETURN      A  Red   AUDIO    B  Green        CLR  C  Yellow    D  Blue         B Blu ray Disc HD DVD player operation       Available buttons                                   2   TOP MENU OSOURCE   0   A Y      DISPLAY  ENTER MUTING      SETUP    CH      O    H  BI   lt  lt    gt  gt   DISC      de   gt    42  MENU       A  Red    RETURN  B  Green  AUDIO     C  Yellow       CLR  D  Blue        Number  1 to 9  0          Number  41071             Press the appropriate REMOTE  MODE button first     RECEIVER                      SELECTOR                   c   qm           ner        ZONES urn 0      8    9     f  SP GUIDE      20     E  O PLAYLIST            J           
92. COAXIAL 2  CBL SAT   Satellite cable set top box   W  etc     COAXIAL 3  STB DVR   Set top box digital video v  recorder  etc                                                                OPTICAL 1  GAME  Game consoles v  OPTICAL 2  TV CD  TV  CD player v  4   ETHERNET Router  5   MONITOR OUT TV  projector  etc   BD DVD IN Blu ray Disc DVD player  CBL SAT IN Satellite cable set top box   etc   STB DVR IN Set top box digital video  recorder  etc  GAME IN Game console  RI dock  PC IN Personal computer  TV CD IN TV  CD player  cassette    tape deck  MD  CD R   Turntable 4  RI dock                                              PHONO IN Turntable 4  6   COMPONENT VIDEO  MONITOR OUT TV  projector  etc   IN 1  BD DVD  Blu ray Disc DVD player   W  RI dock  IN 2  CBL SAT  Satellite cable set top box   W  RI dock  etc   7   PCIN 5 Personal computer                5       Connections    Note Connecting Onkyo RI Components                                               1 When the USB input is selected  you can input video signals  from the VIDEO jack  Video signals input from VIDEO will 1 Make sure that each Onkyo component is connected    be output from the MONITOR OUT V and HDMI output with an analog audio cable  connection  5  in the E5   jacks  hookup examples    gt  page 17         2 Do not connect the AV receiver   s USB port to a USB port on  your computer  Music on your computer cannot be played 2 Make the RI connection  see the illustration    through the AV receiver in this way 
93. IFLD  compatible   player recorder      When playback is started on the player recorder  AV  receiver will switch to the HDMI input of the  player recorder that is playing back      Operation of the player recorder is possible using the  remote controller supplied with the AV receiver       Depending on the model used  not all operations may be  available     Ly To be continued    5       E How to connect and setup    1 Confirm the connection and settings   1  Connect the HDMI OUT MAIN jack to the HDMI  input jack of the TV     Blu ray Disc DVD player  etc     um    HDMI  connection    AV receiver    EI    DIGITAL AUDIO 1 1 HDMI  connection connection   OPTICAL                                                             TV  projector  etc     2  Connect the audio output from the TV to the  OPTICAL IN 2 jack of the AV receiver using an  optical digital cable     Note    When the audio return channel  ARC  function is used with  an ARC capable TV  this connection is not necessary    gt  page 67    3  Connect the HDMI output of the Blu ray  Disc DVD player recorder to the HDMI IN 1 jack  of the AV receiver     Note      It is necessary to assign the HDMI input when connecting  the Blu ray Disc DVD player recorder to other jacks    page 53   Do not assign an HDMI IN to the TV CD  selector at this time  otherwise appropriate CEC  Consumer  Electronics Control  operation will not be guaranteed     2 Change each item in the    HDMI    menu according  to the following settings     HD
94. IN and PHONO IN        HDMI IN and HDMI output  HDMI OUT MAIN and  HDMI OUT SUB  jacks       MONITOR OUT V jack      COMPONENT VIDEO IN and MONITOR OUT  jacks    IR IN jack   9 ZONE 2 12V TRIGGER OUT jack  ZONE 2 ZONE 3 LINE OUT jacks                FM ANTENNA jack and AM ANTENNA terminal   2 PC IN jack  43 Power cord  North American models   DIGITAL IN COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks   9 GND screw  PRE OUT jacks   FRONT L R  CENTER  SURR L R   SB FH FW  L R  SUBWOOFER     SB   Surround Back  FH   Front High  FW   Front Wide    Speaker Terminals     FRONT L R  CENTER  SURR L R   SURR BACK L R  FRONT HIGH ZONE 3 L R and  FRONT WIDE ZONE 2 L R     AC INLET  European  Australian  Asian and  Taiwanese models        En 10                                                                FRONT zonez        WIDE L BONES L SURRL       See  Connecting the AV Receiver  for connection   2 pages 12 to 19      Remote Controller    RECEIVER    x         22          SETUP  AUDIO RETURN       RC 836M       To control the AV receiver  press RECEIVER to select  Receiver mode    You can also use the remote controller to control  Onkyo Blu ray Disc DVD player  CD player  and  other components    See    Entering Remote Control Codes  for more  details   gt  page 76      For detailed information  see the pages in parentheses    D RECEIVER button  20     2 REMOTE MODE INPUT SELECTOR buttons  23    9 SP  speaker layout  button  47      A V 4  gt  and ENTER buttons      Q SETUP button  48       Listening Mode
95. In     puis appuyez sur  ENTER pour utiliser une version restreinte du  service    Veuillez noter que l   utilisation est restreinte     Conseil      Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes utilisateur   consultez    Utilisation de plusieurs comptes      gt  page 1    L identification peut   tre r  alis  e    partir de l   cran     Users       Utilisez A V pour s  lectionner un   l  ment du menu    puis appuyez sur ENTER    Pour vous d  connecter  utilisez A V pour s  lectionner       Sign out    depuis cet   cran  puis appuyez sur  ENTER     Utilisez A V pour s  lectionner une station  puis  appuyez sur ENTER ou B  pour d  marrer la  lecture depuis cette station    L   cran de lecture apparait     6 Vous pouvez contr  lez les pistes avec les touches sur    la t  l  commande   Boutons activ  s    gt   II  W   gt  gt      E El  ments du menu   Rate Song as Favorite     Permet de stocker des informations sur le serveur  et  d augmenter la probabilit   que le morceau soit lu de  nouveau    Ban Song     Permet de stocker des informations sur le serveur  et  de diminuer la probabilit   que le morceau soit lu de  nouveau    Ban Artist     Permet de stocker des informations sur le serveur  et  de diminuer la probabilit   que les morceaux de cet  artiste soient lus de nouveau    Mark Favorite     Permet d ajouter la station en cours de lecture    vos  favoris    Unmark Favorite     Permet de supprimer la station en cours de lecture de  vos favoris    Add song to Library     Perm
96. Internet Radio    for details   gt  page 28    The volume value of the remote window and the  volume value of the AV receiver may not always  match   Adjustments you make to the volume in the AV  receiver will not be reflected in the    Remote  playback    window     Note      Remote playback cannot be used in any of the following cases         Network services are being used         Contents are being played from a USB device or iPod iPhone         Zones are turned on        En30 Y    Turning On  amp  Basic Operations    Playing Music Files on a Shared Folder    This section explains how to play music files on a  computer or NAS  Network Attached Storage  through the  AV receiver     Windows 7 Setup    E Setting the sharing options    1            Select    Choose homegroup and sharing options    on  the Control Panel    Tip    If this option is not available  verify that    View by     is set to       Category        Select    Change advanced sharing settings        Under    Home or Work     verify that the following  items are checked       Turn on network discovery        Turn on file and  printer sharing        Turn on sharing so anyone with  network access can read and write files in the Public    folders     and    Turn off password protected sharing        Select    Save changes    and click    OK    on the  confirmation screen     E Creating a shared folder   1 Right click the folder that you want to share    2 Select    Properties       3 On the    Sharing    tab  s
97. LNA certified media server   If the operating system of your computer is Windows   Vista  Windows Media Player 11 is already installed    Windows Media Player 11 for Windows XP can be   downloaded for free from the Microsoft web site      The computer or media server must be on the same  network as the AV receiver      Up to 20 000 folders can be displayed  and folders may  be nested up to 16 levels deep     Note      Depending on the media server  the AV receiver may not  recognize it  or may not be able to play its music files     Minimum system requirements for Windows Media  Player 11 on Windows XP   Operating system   Windows XP Home Edition  SP2   Windows XP  Professional  SP2   Windows XP Tablet PC Edition   SP2   Update Rollup 2 for Windows XP Media Center  Edition 2005  KB900325   October 2006 Update Rollup  for Windows XP Media Center Edition  KB925766     233 MHz Intel Pentium II  Advanced  Micro Devices  AMD   etc     64 MB   200 MB of free space   CD or DVD drive   28 8 kbps   16 bit sound card   Super VGA  800 x 600    64 MB VRAM  DirectX 9 0b    Microsoft ActiveSync  only when  using a Windows Mobile based Pocket  PC or smartphone     Processor     Memory   Hard disk   Drive   Modem   Sound card   Monitor   Video card   Software     Web browser     Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 or  Netscape 7 1       E Remote playback    Windows Media Player 12    DLNA certified  within DLNA Interoperability    Guidelines version 1 5  media server or controller device     The s
98. MI Control RIHD   On    Audio Return Channel  ARC   Auto  See details of each setting   gt  page 67      3 Confirm the settings    1  Turn on the power for all connected components    2  Turn off the power of the TV  and confirm that the  power of the connected components is turned off  automatically with the link operation    3  Turn on the power of the Blu ray Disc DVD  player recorder    4  Start playback on the Blu ray Disc DVD  player recorder  and verify the following      The AV receiver automatically turns on  and  selects the input to which the Blu ray  Disc DVD player recorder is connected      The TV automatically turns on  and selects the  input to which the AV receiver is connected    5  Following the operating instructions of the TV   select    Use the TV speakers  from the menu  screen of the TV  and confirm that the audio is  output from the speakers of the TV  and not from  the speakers connected to the AV receiver    6  Select    Use the speakers connected from the AV  receiver  from the menu screen of the TV  and  confirm that the audio is output from the speakers  connected to the AV receiver  and not from the  TV speakers     Note      Perform the above operations when you use the AV receiver  for the first time  when the settings of each component are  changed  when the main power of each component is turned  off  when the power cable is disconnected from the power  supply  or when there has been a power outage        En94 V    Appendix    Operate with t
99. Multichannel  DTS  DTS HD High Resolution Audio   DTS HD Master Audio  DTS Express  DSD  Dolby EX   Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height  Dolby PLIIx Movie  DTS  Neo 6 Cinema and 5 1 channel source   Neo 6        Re EQ THX      Off   gt  On  This function can be used with the following listening  modes  THX Cinema  THX Surround EX  and  THX Select2 Cinema     Note      These settings are stored individually for each input selector  In  THX listening mode however  the setting will return to    On     when the AV receiver is turned off      These settings cannot be used while a pair of headphones is  connected     Using the Setup Menu  HOME     RECEIVER       Remote  indicator  RECEIVER  ENTER  AV         RETURN    SETUP      RETURN    HOME         Press RECEIVER followed by HOME   Use  lt   gt  to select    Setup     and then press ENTER     Use A V to select a main menu item  and then press  ENTER     Use A V to select a sub menu item  and then press  ENTER     Use A F to select a setting target  and use  lt   gt  to  change the setting    Press HOME to close the menu    Press RETURN to return to the previous menu     Q1 A GO           Note     This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver by  using SETUP  the cursor buttons  and ENTER      During Audyssey 2EQ   Room Correction and Speaker Setup   messages  etc   that are displayed on the TV screen will appear on  the AV receiver   s display     Bi Screen Saver   If there is no video signal on the current input source and  no
100. My Library    Sit back and enjoy selections from all the music you    ve  heard since you joined Last fm    Tag Radio    Polish funk  Death pop  Think of a style and we ll  entertain you with it for hours     Start your free trial straight away when you create your  account and see for yourself what it   s like to have the  world   s music at your fingertips  Latest prices and full  information are available at www last fm subscribe    1 Use A V to select    Sign in to your account     and  then press ENTER   If you have the existing Last fm account  you can sign  in to your account to select    Sign in to your  account     Enter your user name and password in the  next keyboard screen     E Using the keyboard screen   1  Use A     lt 4   gt  and the ENTER to enter your user  name and password    2  Select    OK       3  Press ENTER  The    Confirm your entries     screen appears    4  Press ENTER       Please wait       appears and then    Last fm Internet   Radio    screen appears    Tip    If you want to use multiple user accounts  see    Using    Multiple Accounts      gt  page 1   Login can be made from  the    Users    screen     2 Use    Y to select menu and then press ENTER     Search Station    You can search station by Artist  Tag  or User Name    Top Artists Station    You can play tracks of top rated artists    Top Tags Station    You can play tracks of top rated tags    Personal Station      You can play tracks from personalized station      Your Library        Y
101. ONKYO    AV RECEIVER    TX NIRZ 17    Instruction Manual    Made for    S iPod  iPhone                                        Contents  Safety Information and Introduction              2  Table of Contents    6                      caccia ur 12  Turning On  amp  Basic Operations                   20  Advanced                                                        48  Controlling Other Components                    73  A A O 80    Internet Radio Guide    Remote Control Codes       WARNING    TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK   DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR  MOISTURE     CAUTION    TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK  DO NOT  REMOVE COVER  OR BACK   NO USER SERVICEABLE  PARTS INSIDE  REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED  SERVICE PERSONNEL       WARNING    AVIS  RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK   RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE  DO NOT OPEN NE PAS OUVRIR    The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol  within an   equilateral triangle  is intended to alert the user to the  AN presence of uninsulated    dangerous voltage    within   the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient  magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to  persons   The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is  intended to alert the user to the presence of important  operating and maintenance  servicing  instructions in  the literature accompanying the appliance     A             Important Safety Instructions      Read these instructions    Keep these instructions    Heed all warnings    Follow 
102. OTE MODE  afstandsbedieningsmodus    Het indicatielampje   afstandsbediening knippert tweemaal    Indien de afstandsbedieningscode niet met succes wordt ingevoerd  zal de toets   REMOTE MODE Remote indicator eenmaal traag knipperen    Opmerkingen      Het knippergedeelte van de afstandsbediening zal verschillen ten opzichte van het model van  uw AV receiver      De afstandsbediening is voorgeprogrammeerd met voorkeuzetoetsen van verschillende  componenten  Door het invullen van een code uit de afstandsbediening codelijst kunt u de  voorkeuzetoets voor die component activeren      Wanneer er meerdere codes gerelateerd zijn aan     n fabrikant  probeer deze dan een voor een  totdat de juiste code overeenkomt met uw component      Afhankelijk van het model en het bouwjaar van uw component is de compatibiliteit niet  gegarandeerd      Bij sommige modellen werkt de afstandsbediening mogelijk niet of is de compatibiliteit ervan  beperkt tot een deel van de functionaliteit van de component      Daarnaast is het niet mogelijk om nieuwe codes aan de bestaande voorkeuzetoetsen van de  afstandsbediening toe te voegen      Hoewel de gegeven afstandsbedieningscodes correct zijn op het moment van afdrukken  kunnen  deze door de fabrikant gewijzigd worden     Remote Control Codes    Fj  rrstyrningskoder    1    Hall ned knappen f  r det REMOTE MODE som du vill tilldela en kod samtidigt   som du trycker och h  ller ned  DISPLA Y   i cirka 3 sekunder     REMOTE MODE knapp Fj  rrindikatorlampa
103. PVR Combination 01662  01693  01850  Addison 10653  Triax 00853  01251  01291   sat 01300 02059  02060  02211  AEG 11037  11324  0141310161191626  Amstrad 01175  01662  01693 02037  01631   Panasonic 01304  03099 Agfaphoto       Atsat 01300        Tricolor TV 01176 Aiko 10037  Phili 00099  True Visions 02408 Bell ExpressVu 00775 5 Lips        Aim 10037  10499  UT Mene 01611 British Sky 01175  01662 pd 1    Broadcasting Sat Control 01300                10          y    Remote Control Codes                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   Television Television Television Television  Akai 10178  10556  10037  Basic Line 10556  10037  10668  Casio 10037 Dick Smith 10698  10714  10715  10208  11037 Cathay 10037 Electronics    11675        10037  10195  10512        10037 Digatron 10037  Akiba 10037 Beaumark 10178 Centrum 11037 Digihome 11667  Akito 10037 Beijing 10208 Camion 10037 Digiline 10037  10668  Akura 10171  10037  10714  Beko 10037  10714  10715  Changhong 10508 Digitek 11709  10668  11037  11363  11652     RT  11585  11667  11709 a5 Tm Chimei 11666 Digitor     elson E ixi  Alba 10037  10714  10668  Clarivox 10037 Dizi 10097  11037  11585 Belstat 11037 Classic 10499 DL 113
104. RI MODE switch to    HDD    or     HDD DOCK         Set the AV receiver   s Input Display to    DOCK      page 46      E System Function    Depending on your iPod iPhone model and generation   some of the linked operations may not be available     System On   When you turn on the AV receiver  the RI Dock and  iPod iPhone turn on automatically  In addition  when RI  Dock and iPod iPhone are on  the AV receiver can be  turned on by pressing DSOURCE    Auto Power On   If you press the remote controller s  amp  amp    Playback  while  the AV receiver is on standby  the AV receiver will  automatically turn on  select your iPod iPhone as the input  source  and your iPod iPhone will start playback    Direct Change   If you start iPod iPhone playback while listening to another  input source  the AV receiver will automatically switch to  the input to which the RI Dock is connected        En 73       Controlling Other Components    Other Remote Operations   You can use the remote controller that came with the AV  receiver to control other iPod iPhone functions  The  available functionality depends on the AV receiver     Note      If you use your iPod iPhone with any other accessories   iPod iPhone playback detection may not work      The System On function may not work depending on the RI  Dock     iPod Alarm   If you use the Alarm function on your iPod to start  playback  the AV receiver will turn on at the specified time  and select your iPod as the input source automatically     Not
105. S  and worldwide patents issued   amp  pending  DTS HD  the Symbol   amp  DTS HD and the Symbol  together are registered trademarks  amp  DTS HD Master Audio is a  trademark of DTS  Inc  Product includes software     DTS  Inc   All Rights Reserved         CX  DOLBY  TRUE   PRO LOGIC liz       Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories  Dolby   Pro Logic  Surround EX and the double D symbol are  trademarks of Dolby Laboratories        Music Optimizer    is a trademark of Onkyo Corporation           HDMI  the HDMI Logo  and High Definition Multimedia  Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of  HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries        uw  m   E   m   a   4   N   v       c  ul       THX and the THX logo are trademarks of THX Ltd  which may  be registered in some jurisdictions  All rights reserved        THX Select2 Plus   Before any home theater component can be THX Select2  Plus certified  it must pass a rigorous series of quality and  performance tests  Only then can a product feature the  THX Select2 Plus logo  which is your guarantee that the  Home Theater products you purchase will give you  superb performance for many years to come  THX  Select2 Plus requirements define hundreds of parameters   including power amplifier performance  and pre   amplifier performance and operation for both digital and  analog domains  THX Select2 Plus receivers also feature  proprietary THX technologies  e g   THX Mode  which  accurately translate m
106. S  but not DTS HD  format input signals  will be heard  If the input signal is not DTS  the dts  indicator will flash and there will be no sound   When    HDMI        COAXIAL    or    OPTICAL    is selected  in the    Audio Selector    setting  you can then specify the  signal type in    Fixed Mode      Normally  the AV receiver detects the signal format  automatically  However  if you experience either of the  following issues when playing PCM or DTS material  you  can manually set the signal format to PCM or DTS     If the beginnings of tracks from a PCM source are cut off   try setting the format to PCM      f noise is produced when fast forwarding or reversing a  DTS CD  try setting the format to DTS     Note      The setting will be reset to    Off    when you change the setting in   Audio Selector      A Ene V    Advanced Operations    Listening Mode Preset   1 2 3 22   gt        4   META Listening Mode Preset    You can assign a default listening mode to each input  source that will be selected automatically when you select  each input source  For example  you can set the default  listening mode to be used with Dolby Digital input signals   You can select other listening modes during playback  but  the mode specified here will be resumed once the AV  receiver has been set to standby        1 Use A Y to select the input source that you want to  set  and then press ENTER     The following menu appears              5 1  Listening Mode Preset BD DVD  Analog PCM Last Valid 
107. SB device contains a lot of data  the AV receiver may take   a while to read it    Operation is not guaranteed for all USB devices  which includes   the ability to power them    Onkyo takes no responsibility whatsoever for the loss or damage   of data resulting from the use of a USB device with the AV   receiver  Onkyo recommends that you back up your important   music files beforehand      If you connect a USB hard disk drive to the USB port  Onkyo  recommends that you use its AC adapter to power it      USB hubs and USB devices with hub functions are not supported   Do not connect your USB device via a USB hub      USB devices with security functions are not supported     Limitation of liability   The program and accompanying online documentation  are furnished to you for use at your own risk  Onkyo will  not be liable and you will have no remedy for damages  for any claim of any kind whatsoever concerning your  use of the program or the accompanying online  documentation  regardless of legal theory  and whether  arising in tort or contract  In no event will Onkyo be  liable to you or any third party for any special  indirect   incidental  or consequential damages of any kind   including  but not limited to  compensation   reimbursement or damages on account of the loss of  present or prospective profits  loss of data  or for any  other reason whatsoever     See the Onkyo web site for latest information        En 36       Appendix    Updating the Firmware via Network    The
108. Seleccione  OK     3  Pulse ENTER  Aparecer   la pantalla  Confirm    your entries    4  Pulse ENTER     Consejo      Sidesea utilizar m  ltiples cuentas de usuario  consulte    Uso  de m  ltiples cuentas    gt  p  gina 1   Se puede iniciar  sesi  n desde la pantalla    Users        2 Utilice A Y para seleccionar el men   y luego pulse    ENTER    Search    Puede buscar m  sica por artista    lbum o canci  n   Music Guide    Puede reproducir canciones por g  neros  artistas  principales    lbumes principales o canciones  principales  novedades  selecci  n del sitio   Rhapsody Channels    Escuche las emisoras de radio programadas por los  principales redactores de Rhapsody    Playlists    Reproduzca sus listas personales    My Library    Marque sus   lbumes y canciones preferidas en el  cat  logo de Rhapsody  usando Mi biblioteca   Account Info    Confirme los datos de su cuenta    Sign Out    Salga de su cuenta Rhapsody        Es3 V    Uso de Internet Radio    3 Utilice A V para seleccionar una emisora y luego    pulse ENTER o      para iniciar la reproducci  n   Se inicia la reproducci  n y aparece la pantalla de  reproducci  n    Puede controlar las pistas con los botones del mando a  distancia    Botones activados   gt   LE  Bl   lt  lt    gt  gt    lt  lt     gt  gt   RANDOM  REPEAT    Nota      En Rhapsody Channels  algunos de los botones no  funcionan     E Elementos del men     Add track to My Library    Marca las canciones que se est  n reproduciendo  actualmente    A
109. Teile der Funktionalit  t der Komponente beschr  nkt      Abgesehen davon ist es nicht m  glich  den bestehenden Voreinstellungen der Fernbedienung  neue Codes hinzuzuf  gen      Obwohl die angegebenen Fernbedienungscodes dem Stand bei Drucklegung entsprechen  sind    nderungen durch den Hersteller vorbehalten     Y de    Afstandsbedieningscodes    1    Houd terwijl u de REMOTE MODE toets ingedrukt houdt waarvoor u een code   wilt toewijzen de  DISPLAY  toets ingedrukt  ongeveer 3 seconden     De toets REMOTE MODE  afstandsbedieningsmodus    Het indicatielampje   afstandsbediening gaat branden    Op producten van Integra staan de namen van de toetesn in hoofdletters  Bijvoorbeeld    de toetsen    Remote Mode    en    Display       Opmerkingen      Er kunnen geen afstandsbedieningscodes worden ingevoerd voor  RECEIVER  en de multi  zone toets      Alleen TV afstandsbedieningscodes kunnen worden ingevoerd voor  TV       Behalve voor  RECEIVER    TV  en de multi zone toets  kunnen afstandsbedieningscodes  vanuit elke categorie worden toegewezen aan de REMOTE MODE toetsen  Deze toetsen  werken overigens ook als ingangsselectortoetsen  kies dus een REMOTE MODE toets die  overeenkomt met de ingang waarop u uw component wilt aansluiten  Kies indien u bijvoorbeeld  uw CD speler aansluit op de CD ingang de  TV CD  toets bij het invoeren van de  afstandsbedieningscode     Gebruik binnen 30 seconden de cijfertoetsen om de 5 cijferige   afstandsbedieningscode in te voeren    De toets REM
110. URCE          9e       MUTING          En79         With some components  certain buttons may not work as    expected  and some may not work at all     See  Controlling Your iPod iPhone  about the operation of    iPod iPhone   page 74       1 The  RIFLD function is not supported  The RIFID  supported by the AV receiver is the CEC system control  function of the HDMI standard     5       Troubleshooting    If you have any trouble using the AV receiver  look for a  solution in this section  If you can t resolve the issue  yourself  contact your Onkyo dealer        If you can t resolve the issue yourself  try resetting the  AV receiver before contacting your Onkyo dealer    To reset the AV receiver to its factory defaults  turn it  on and  while holding down CBL SAT  press  OON STANDBY     Clear    will appear on the AV  receiver   s display and the AV receiver will enter  standby mode     0  CBL SAT    ON STANDBY         Note that resetting the AV receiver will delete your radio  presets and custom settings     RECEIVER  Remote indicator    RECEIVER    RETURN    HOME       To reset the remote controller to its factory defaults   while holding down RECEIVER  press and hold down  HOME until the remote indicator lights  about 3  seconds   Within 30 seconds  press RECEIVER again     The on screen information appears only on a TV that  is connected to HDMI outputs  If your TV is  connected to other video outputs  use the AV  receiver   s display when changing settings     Power    B
111. With this setting  you can specify the listening mode  used when Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital Plus format  digital audio signals are played  DVD  etc    Specifies  the default listening mode for Dolby TrueHD sources   such as Blu ray or HD DVD  input via HDMI      B DTS DTS ES DTS HD  With this setting  you can specify the listening mode  used when DTS or DTS HD High Resolution format  digital audio signals are played  DVD  LD  CD  etc     Specifies the default listening mode for DTS HD Master  Audio sources  such as Blu ray or HD DVD  input via  HDMI      Bi Other Multich Source  Specifies the default listening mode for multichannel  PCM sources from HDMI IN such as DVD Audio  and  DSD multichannel sources such as Super Audio CD             65       Advanced Operations  Miscellaneous  1 2 3   gt      gt  4  META Miscellaneous    Volume Setup       E Volume Display     Absolute    Displayed range is Min  0 5 to 99 5  Max     gt  Relative  THX     Displayed range is  codB   81 5dB to  18 0dB   With this setting  you can choose how the volume level is  displayed    The absolute value 82 is equivalent to the relative value  0 dB     Note      f the absolute value is set to 82     82 0Ref    will appear on the  display and the THX indicator will flash    E Muting Level         codB  fully muted    50dB to  10dB in 10 dB steps   This setting determines how much the output is muted when  the muting function is used   gt  page 47         E Maximum Volume      Off  50 to 99  Absolu
112. Y New Zealand  02211  Supernova 09887 Vestel 01251  01284 DigiQuest 01300 SKY PerfecTV  02299  03099  nee  ai Viasat 01195 DirecTV 01377  00099  20739        01662  Systec ne Vision 01626 Dish Network 00775 Skyplus 01175  01334  Sytech          Visiosat 01413  01457 Dishpro 00775 Smart 01631  TBoston ene Vitecom 01413 Dream Multimedia 01237 Sony 02299         0 Vivax 02418 Echostar 00775  02527 Stream System 01300  Technical 0162  Volcasat 02418 Edision 01631 Strong 01300  Testis          Wavelength 01413 Expressvu 00775 Sunny 01300  Dos 01109  01135 Wharfedale 01284 Foxtel 01356 TechniSat 01195  Technosat 0120 Wisi 00173 Humax 01176  01427  01675  Technosat 01206  Techwood 01251  01284  01626 Worldsat 01251 01808 Telefonica 02527  TELE System 01251  01409  01611 Woxter 02418 ID Sat 01334 Telestar 01195  Telefonica 02527  02761 Xsat 00847  01323 iNETBOX 01237 Thomson 01175  01662  Telestar o es 01251  Xtreme 01300 Kaon 01300 Topfield 01206     Kathrein 01561 Viasat 01195  Televes 01300  01334 Yakumo         2 Maximum 01334 Xtreme 01300  Televisa 00887 Tes u    Der wenn Zehnder 01251  01334  01413  Mediacom 01206    01631 MegaSat 01631 Television  men E Mem ne Zinwell 02280  02761 Movistar 02527 AR  Systems 103367 10097  em TE   Multichoice 02059  02060 Accent 10037       01206 Satellite Set        Box MySky 01356  01693  01850 Acer 11339  7 Pub TET  sat 01300 NEOTION 01334 Acoustic Solutions 11037  11667  oshiba  gt        017           01175  01356  01423  Action 10650  SAT 
113. able  the name of the connected  component is displayed on the AV receiver display  For example   while you are watching TV broadcasting  if you operate a Blu ray  Disc DVD player  being powered on  with the remote control of  the AV receiver  the name of the Blu ray Disc DVD player will  be displayed on the AV receiver    Set it to    Off    when a connected piece of equipment is not    compatible or it is unclear whether the equipment is compatible  or not     Tf operation is not normal when set to    On     change the setting to     off       Refer to the connected component   s instruction manual for  details    When the    HDMI Control RIHD     setting is set to    On     the  power consumption on standby mode slightly increases    Depending on the TV status  the AV receiver will enter standby  mode as usual     The f31I ID control does not support HDMI OUT SUB  Use  HDMI OUT MAIN instead    When the source equipment is connected with the RI  connection  it may malfunction if    HDMI Control RIHD     is  set to    On        B HDMI Through   gt  Off   gt  BD DVD  CBL SAT  STB DVR  GAME  PC  AUX   TV CD  PHONO   Selects the input source for which the HDMI  Through function is enabled    gt  Last   The HDMI Through function is activated on the input  source selected at the time of setting the AV receiver  to standby mode   When enabling the HDMI Through function  regardless of  whether the AV receiver is on or in standby  both audio  and video streams from an HDMI input wil
114. aff Picks   Rhapsody Channels    Listen to radio channels programmed by Rhapsody    s  top notch editors    Playlists    Play your own personal playlists    My Library    Bookmark your favorite albums and tracks from the  Rhapsody catalog using My Library    Account Info    Confirm your account information    Sign Out    Sign out from your Rhapsody account                   Using Internet Radio    3 Use A F to select a channel  and press ENTER or       to start playback    Playback starts and the playback screen appears   You can control the tracks with the buttons on the  remote control    Enabled buttons   gt   11  W  444  gt  gt    lt  lt    gt  gt      RANDOM  REPEAT    Note    On Rhapsody Channels  some of the buttons don t work     E Menu Items   Add track to My Library    Bookmark currently playing tracks    Add album to My Library    Bookmark currently playing albums    Add playlist to My Library    Bookmark currently playing playlists    Add channel to My Channels    Bookmark currently playing Rhapsody radio  channels     Add to My Favorites    Adds a track  channel or playlist to My Favorites list   Tip     You can remove bookmarked tracks  albums  and Rhapsody  Channels from My Library     Using the SiriusXM Internet Radio   North American only     Your Onkyo AV receiver includes a free trial of SiriusXM  Internet Radio  The    Account Info    screen shows how  many days are left in your trial  After the trial period  expires  if you want to continue listening to t
115. affiche  puis l   cran    SiriusXM   Internet Radio    affiche la cat  gorie que vous   pouvez s  lectionner     2 Utilisez A Y pour s  lectionner la cat  gorie  puis    appuyez sur ENTER   L   cran de la liste des canaux de la cat  gorie  s  lectionn  e s affiche     3 Utilisez A Y pour s  lectionner le canal de votre    choix  puis appuyez sur ENTER    L   cran de lecture du canal s  lectionn   s affiche et  vous pouvez   couter SiriusXM Internet Radio    Vous pouvez contr  lez les pistes avec les touches sur  la t  l  commande     Boutons activ  s   Bl         lt  lt    gt  gt     E El  ments du menu  Add to My Favorites    Permet d ajouter un canal    la liste My Favorites        Fra V    Utilisation d une webradio      Siriusxm      INTERNET RADIO  Les abonnements SiriusXM Internet Radio sont vendus  s  par  ment et sont subordonn  s par les conditions Sirius   voir www sirius com   Assurez vous de lire cet accord  avant d acqu  rir votre abonnement  Sirius  XM et tous les  logos et marques aff  rents sont des marques d  pos  es de  Sirius XM Radio Inc  et de ses filiales  Tous droits  r  serv  s     Utilisation de la webradio Last fm    Last fm un service de musique qui apprend ce que vous  aimez      Votre nouvel ampli tuner AV Onkyo est tr  s intelligent  Si  vous avez un compte Last fm gratuit  il garde une trace de  toutes les chansons que vous avez juste jou  es  Quand vous  vous rendez sur le site Web de Last fm  vous pouvez voir  les graphiques personnels de la m
116. ailable in either of the following cases         The    Audio TV Out    setting is set to    On      gt  page 67           HDMI Control RIHD     is set to    On      gt  page 67  and  you re listening through your TV speakers     Tone Control    E Bass     104   to OdB to  10dB in 2 dB steps  You can boost or cut low frequency sounds output  from the front speakers     B Treble   gt   10dB to 04   to  10dB in 2 dB steps  You can boost or cut high frequency sounds output  from the front speakers   You can adjust the bass and treble for the front speakers   except when the Direct  Pure Audio or THX listening  mode is selected     Operating on the AV receiver    Press TONE repeatedly to select either    Bass    or     Treble        2 Use     and   to adjust        En49 Y    Advanced Operations    Speaker Levels    E Subwoofer Level     15 04   to 0 0dB to  12 0dB in 0 5 dB steps       Bi Center Level    gt   12 0dB to 0 0dB to  12 0dB in 0 5 dB steps  You can adjust the volume of each speaker while listening  to an input source        These temporary adjustments are cancelled when the AV  receiver is set to standby  To save the setting you made  here  go to    Level Calibration    gt  page 56  before  setting the AV receiver to standby     Note      You cannot use these function while the AV receiver is muted     These settings cannot be used while a pair of headphones is  connected     Speakers that are set to    No    or    None    in     Speaker Configuration      gt  page 55
117. all instructions    Do not use this apparatus near water    Clean only with dry cloth    Do not block any ventilation openings  Install in  accordance with the manufacturer s instructions   8  Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators   heat registers  stoves  or other apparatus  including  amplifiers  that produce heat           5    5    b    NAM EWN         9     10     11     12     13     14     15     Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or  grounding type plug  A polarized plug has two blades  with one wider than the other  A grounding type plug  has two blades and a third grounding prong  The wide  blade or the third prong are provided for your safety  If  the provided plug does not fit into your outlet  consult  an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet   Protect the power cord from being walked on or  pinched particularly at plugs  convenience receptacles   and the point where they exit from the apparatus   Only use attachments accessories specified by the  manufacturer   Use only with the cart  stand   tripod  bracket  or table  specified by the manufacturer   or sold with the apparatus   When a cart is used  use  caution when moving the  cart apparatus combination to ER        avoid injury from tip over          Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when  unused for long periods of time   Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel   Servicing is required when the apparatus has been  damaged in any way  such 
118. ally those with a DTS ES Matrix  soundtrack                                                          41    y    Turning On  amp  Basic Operations                Listening Mode Description Input Speaker Listening Mode Description Input Speaker  Source  Layout Source  Layout  Dolby Pro Logic IIx 7  Dolby Pro Logic IIx expands any 2 channel DTS Neo 6 This mode expands any 2 channel source for  Dolby Pro Logic Il source for 7 1 channel playback  It provides up to 7 1 channel playback  It uses seven    a very natural and seamless surround sound full bandwidth channels of matrix decoding         vie experience that fully envelops the listener  for matrix encoded material  providing a    As well as music and movies  video games very natural and seamless surround sound  O Te can also benefit from the dramatic spatial experience that fully envelops the listener   ELITES effects and vivid imaging         DTS Neo 6 Cinema SE  3161  If you re not using any surround back GE    3 1  5 1  Metre Se idem Use this mode with any stereo movie  e g      PLIx Movie    PLIx Music    PLIx Game    speakers  Dolby Pro Logic II will be used   instead of Dolby Pro Logic IIx      Dolby PLIIx Movie  Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby  Surround  Pro Logic  movie  e g   TV   DVD  VHS       Dolby PLIIx Music  Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby  Surround  Pro Logic  music source  e g    CD  radio  cassette  TV  VHS  DVD       Dolby PLIIx Game  Use this mode with video games  especially  those that bea
119. an     off           The    Network Standby    setting is set to    On      If an MHL enabled mobile device is connected to the 16  AUX  front  input  the power consumption in standby  mode will increase     Bi The sound changes when   connect       headphones       When a pair of headphones is connected  the listening      mode is set to Stereo  unless it   s already set to Stereo   Mono  Direct  or Pure Audio     E The speaker distance cannot be set as required       The values entered may be automatically adjusted      with values best suited for your home theater     E The display doesn t work       The display is turned off when the Pure Audio      listening mode is selected     E How do I change the language of a multiplex  source       Use the    Multiplex    setting in the    Audio Adjust    58  menu to select    Main    or  Sub      B The RI functions don t work       To use RI  you must make an RI connection and      18  analog audio connection  RCA  between the   component and AV receiver  even if they are   connected digitally     A      84 V    Appendix       While Zone 2 3 is selected  the RI functions don   t 18  work     E The functions System On Auto Power On and    Direct Change don t work for components  connected via RI       These functions don   t work when Zone 2 3 is turned 18  on     E When performing Automatic Speaker Setup  the    measurement fails and the message  Ambient  noise is too high   is displayed        This can be caused by a malfunction 
120. area      Third measurement position  The left side of the listening area     The distances from position CD to Q and  D to  8  must be  atleast 1 meter  3 3 ft                     La ls        o o                   pe                         8   Gax 59  g D     D to    Listening position         Listening area    A En35       Turning On  amp  Basic Operations    Note      Make the room as quiet as possible  Background noise and Radio  Frequency Interference  RFI  can disrupt the room  measurements  Close windows  televisions  radios  air  conditioners  fluorescent lights  home appliances  light dimmers   or other devices  Turn off the cell phone  even if it is not in use   or place it away from all audio electronics      The microphone picks up test tones played through each speaker  as Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup runs      Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup cannot be  performed while a pair of headphones is connected        1 Turn on the AV receiver and the connected TV   On the TV  select the input to which the AV receiver  is connected     2 Set the speaker setup microphone at the Main  Listening Position  D  and connect it to the SETUP  MIC jack     SETUP MIC jack    SETUP MIC       The speaker setting menu appears     Note     The on screen menus appear only on a TV that is connected  to HDMI OUT MAIN  If your TV is connected to other  video outputs  use the AV receiver   s display when changing  settings     3 When you   ve finished makin
121. arques       Les codes de t  l  commande ne peuvent pas   tre entr  s pour  RECEIVER  et le bouton multi  zone      Seul les code de t  l  commande de t  l  viseurs peuvent   tre entr  s pour  TV     oA l   exception de  RECEIVER    TV  et du bouton multi zone  vous pouvez affecter des codes  de t  l  commande de n   importe quelle cat  gorie pour les boutons REMOTE MODE  Cependant   ces boutons font   galement office de bouton de s  lecteur d entr  e   par cons  quent  choisissez  un bouton REMOTE MODE correspondant    l entr  e    laquelle vous souhaitez raccorder votre  appareil  Par exemple  si vous raccordez votre lecteur CD    l entr  e CD  choisissez  TV CD   lorsque vous saisissez le code de t  l  commande     Vous disposez de 30 secondes pour saisir le code de t  l  commande    cinq chiffres      l aide des boutons num  rot  s    Le bouton REMOTE MODE Ie t  moin Remote clignote deux fois    Si le code de t  l  commande n   a pas   t   saisi correctement le bouton REMOTE   MODE l  indicateur Remote ne clignote qu une seule fois    Remarques       L   l  ment clignotant de la t  l  commande diff  rera selon le mod  le de votre ampli tuner AV      La t  l  commande est pr  configur  e avec des pr  r  glages de t  l  commande de diff  rents  appareils  En entrant un code de la liste des codes de t  l  commandes  vous pouvez activer le  pr  r  glage appropri   pour cet appreil    e Quand il y a de multiples codes li  s    un fabricant  essayez les et entrez les un par un 
122. as power supply cord or  plug is damaged  liquid has been spilled or objects  have fallen into the apparatus  the apparatus has been  exposed to rain or moisture  does not operate normally   or has been dropped   Damage Requiring Service  Unplug the apparatus from the wall outlet and refer  servicing to qualified service personnel under the  following conditions   A  When the power supply cord or plug is damaged   B  If liquid has been spilled  or objects have fallen  into the apparatus   C  If the apparatus has been exposed to rain or water     PORTABLE CART WARNING       A En2 Y    16    17    18    b    Safety Information and Introduction    D  If the apparatus does not operate normally by  following the operating instructions  Adjust only  those controls that are covered by the operating  instructions as an improper adjustment of other  controls may result in damage and will often  require extensive work by a qualified technician to  restore the apparatus to its normal operation    E  Ifthe apparatus has been dropped or damaged in  any way  and   F  When the apparatus exhibits a distinct change in  performance this indicates a need for service    Object and Liquid Entry   Never push objects of any kind into the apparatus   through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage   points or short out parts that could result in a fire or  electric shock    The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or   splashing and no objects filled with liquids  such as   vases shall be
123. at we recommend you  to make before using the AV receiver for the very first  time  A setup wizard is launched upon first time use to let  you perform those settings     The on screen menus appear only on a TV that is  connected to HDMI OUT MAIN     Selecting the Language for the  Onscreen Setup Menus    This step determines the language used for the onscreen   setup menus  See    Language    in    OSD Setup        gt  page 66    Tip     Pressing HOME will close the setup wizard  To restart the initial  setup  select    Initial Setup    in the    Hardware Setup    menu    gt  page 69     After selecting the language for on screen setup menus  a   welcome screen is displayed        Initial Setup    Welcome to initial setup  Have you connected all the speakers and devices   Before starting  please connect speakers and sources   Now  would you like to start initial setup     1st Step   Audyssey 2EQ  Auto Setup  2nd Step   Source Connection  3rd Step   Remote Mode Setup  4th Step   Network Connection  Yes  No       HOME Exit       7 Use A V on the AV receiver or remote controller to  select one of the following options  and then press  ENTER     gt  Yes   Continues to    Audyssey 2EQ  Auto Setup                 Skips the settings and terminates the initial  setup  The setup wizard goes to    Terminating the  Initial Setup      gt  page 22   You can always  restart the initial setup by selecting    Initial  Setup    in the    Hardware Setup    menu      gt  page 69         En21 Y 
124. ate Night function depends on the material that  you are playing and the intention of the original sound designer   and with some material there will be little or no effect when you  select the different options      The Late Night function can be used only when the input source  is Dolby Digital  Dolby Digital Plus  or Dolby TrueHD      The Late Night function is set to    Off    when the AV receiver is  set to standby  For Dolby TrueHD sources  it will be set to     Auto         With Dolby TrueHD sources  the Late Night function cannot be  used when    TrueHD Loudness Management    is set to    Off        Music Optimizer    E Music Optimizer    gt  Off    gt On  The Music Optimizer function enhances the sound quality  of compressed music files  When set to    On     the M Opt  indicator lights on the AV receiver   s display     Note      The Music Optimizer function only works with PCM digital  audio input signals with a sampling rate below 48 kHz and analog  audio input signals      The Music Optimizer is disabled when the Direct or Pure Audio  listening mode is selected    The setting is stored individually for each input selector     A      50 Y    Advanced Operations  Re EQ    With the Re EQ function  you can compensate a  soundtrack whose high frequency content is too harsh   making it more suitable for home theater viewing     Bi Re EQ    gt  Off    gt On  This function can be used with the following listening  modes  Dolby Digital  Dolby Digital Plus  Dolby TrueHD   
125. audio inputs  COAXIAL IN or  OPTICAL IN  have been assigned  HDMI input is  automatically selected as a priority    gt  COAXIAL   This can be selected when COAXIAL IN has been  assigned as an input source  If both coaxial and  HDMI inputs have been assigned  coaxial input is  automatically selected as a priority    gt  OPTICAL   This can be selected when OPTICAL IN has been  assigned as an input source  If both optical and HDMI  inputs have been assigned  optical input is  automatically selected as a priority    gt  Analog   The AV receiver always outputs analog signals   You can set priorities of audio output when there are both  digital and analog inputs     Note      This setting can be made only for an input source that is assigned  to HDMI IN  COAXIAL IN  or OPTICAL IN     This setting cannot be used with the NET and USB input  selectors     When using the Whole House Mode     Audio Selector    is fixed  to    Analog       1 You can select    ARC    if you select the TV CD input selector   But you cannot if you ve selected    Off    in the    Audio Return  Channel    setting   gt  page 67      Setting the Incoming Digital Signal  Fixed  Mode     B Fixed Mode     Off   The format is detected automatically  If no digital  input signal is present  the corresponding analog  input is used instead    gt  PCM   Only 2 channel PCM format input signals will be  heard  If the input signal is not PCM  the PCM  indicator will flash and noise may also be produced    gt  DTS   Only DT
126. be selected automatically in the following order of priority   HDMI  digital  analog     Audio Signal Flow Chart  Blu ray Disc DVD player  etc     vv v y    Analog Optical Coaxial HDMI                AV receiver       HDMI    4                   TV  projector  etc         1 Depends on the    Audio TV Out    setting   gt  page 67      2 This is possible when    Audio Return Channel    is set to     Auto      gt  page 67   the TV CD input selector is selected   and your TV is ARC capable    Tip     When a signal is input via HDMI and the corresponding input  selector is selected  the HDMI indicator lights  In the case of an  optical or coaxial connection  the DIGITAL indicator lights  In    the case of an analog connection  neither of the HDMI and  DIGITAL indicators light        En91 V    Appendix       Appendix    Video Resolution Chart    The following tables show how video signals at different resolutions are output by the AV receiver                                                     NTSC PAL      Output available  Output  HDMI Component Composite  Input 4K 2 1080p 24  1080p    1080i 720p 480p 576p  480i 576i 1080    1080i 720p 480p 576p  480i 576i 480i 576i  HDMI 1080p 24 v       1080   v v       10801    v v      v  720p v v v v        480p 576p   v v v v       480i 576i v v v v v v va  Component 1080p v v      v  1080i v v v      v v  720p v v v v      v  480p 576p   v v v v      v  480i 576i v v v v v      v v  Composite 480i 576i v v v v v         v  PC IN  Analog RG
127. cks up the infrared signals  from the remote controller and feeds them to the AV  receiver located in the cabinet via the connecting block                                          IR  Connecting 225 receiver  block      IR IN            Inside      cabinet Remote controller                    lt  Signal flow       iPod iPhone Playback  via Onkyo Dock    Using the Onkyo Dock    The Dock is sold separately  Models sold are different  depending on the region    For the latest information on the Onkyo Dock  components  see the Onkyo web site at   http   www onkyo com   Before using the Onkyo Dock components  update  your iPod iPhone with the latest software  available  from the Apple web site    For supported iPod iPhone models  see the instruction  manual of the Onkyo Dock     RI Dock    With the RI Dock  you can easily play the music of your    iPod iPhone  or watch the slideshows and videos of your  iPod iPhone on a TV  In addition  the on screen display   OSD  allows you to view  navigate  and select your  iPod iPhone model   s contents on your TV  and with the  supplied remote controller  you can control your  iPod iPhone from the comfort of your sofa  You can even  use the AV receiver   s remote controller to operate your  iPod iPhone     Note     Enter the appropriate remote control code before using the AV  receiver   s remote controller for the first time   gt  page 76       Connect the RI Dock to the AV receiver with an RI cable    gt  page 18       Set the RI Dock   s 
128. conds to recognize the  USB device     7 Press RECEIVER followed by HOME on the remote  controller   The Home menu appears on the TV screen     8 Select    Firmware Update    and press ENTER             88       10    11    12    Appendix    Select    Update via USB    and press ENTER    Note that this option will not be available if there is no  firmware file newer than the currently installed  version     Select    Update    and press ENTER    The update process will begin    During the update process  the on screen display may  disappear depending on the updated program  When  this occurs  you can still view the update progress on  the AV receiver   s display  The on screen display will  reappear after the update is complete  and upon  turning the AV receiver off and on again    Do not turn off the AV receiver and do not remove the  USB device during the update process     The message    Completed     appears on the AV  receiver   s display  indicating that the update has  been completed    Remove the USB device     Turn off the AV receiver using OON STANDBY on  the front panel    Do not use ORECEIVER on the remote controller   Once turned off  the AV receiver will automatically  turn on again    Congratulations  You now have the latest firmware  installed on your Onkyo AV receiver     Troubleshooting    Case 1    If an error occurs     Error         is displayed on the AV  receiver   s display   Alpha numeric characters on the front  display are denoted by asterisks   Ref
129. control codes for the  components you want to operate     1 Use A V to select one of the following options  and  then press ENTER     gt  Yes   Performs the remote control code input  Refer to  step 5 of    Looking up for Remote Control  Codes      gt  page 75        No  Skip   Skips this step and continues to    Network  Connection        2 When you   re finished  select one of the following  options and press ENTER      Yes  Done   The setup wizard continues to    Network  Connection         No  not yet   You can enter other remote control codes     Network Connection    This step checks your network connection     1 Use A V to select one of the following options  and  then press ENTER    gt  Yes   Performs the checkings      No  Skip   Skips this step and terminates the initial setup        En22 Y    Turning On  amp  Basic Operations    2 Follow the instructions on screen to perform the  network checking   The checking is complete when the message     Successfully connected     appears at the middle of  the screen  Press ENTER to terminate the initial  setup     Tip    If you have selected    Wireless  Option      you need to  configure the optional wireless adapter  For further details     see the instruction manual provided with the wireless  adapter  UWF 1    3 If an error message appears  select one of the  following options and press ENTER    gt  Retry    Performs the checking again     gt  No  Do it Later   Skips this step and terminates the initial setup   The setup
130. d    5       Note     1   The video preview is not displayed when       HDMI IN 5 6 7 is the current HDMI input source  or      No signal is present on the current input source     The video of the currently selected input is displayed on the  main screen  not on a preview thumbnail     2    Dynamic EQ    and    Dynamic Volume    cannot be selected  when any of the THX listening modes is selected  with     Loudness Plus    set to    On    or    Preserve THX Settings    set  to    Yes      gt  page 57      3     When the    Monitor Out    setting is set to    Sub        Video      cannot be selected   gt  page 53      This setting cannot be used with the NET input selector     4 Only when you have selected    Custom    in the    Picture  Mode      gt  page 63   pressing ENTER allows you to adjust  the following items via the Quick Setup     Brightness         Contrast        Hue    and    Saturation     Press RETURN to  return to the    Picture Mode    setting       5 Depending on the input source and listening mode  not all  channels shown here output the sound     6 e This setting is not available in either of the following cases        The    Audio TV Out    setting is set to    On      gt  page 67           HDMI Control RIHD     is set to    On      gt  page 67  and  you re listening through your TV speakers     Using the Audio Settings of Quick    Setup       You can change various audio settings from the Quick  Setup   gt  page 48      Note      These settings are not av
131. d Back    setting is set to    None      gt  page 55    this setting cannot be selected      If the  Powered Zone 2 3    setting is set to    Yes    and Zone 2 3 is  turned on  this setting cannot be selected     E TrueHD Loudness Management      Off    gt On  This setting specifies whether or not to apply the Late  Night processing on a Dolby TrueHD source     Note      When this setting is set to    Off     the Late Night function for  Dolby TrueHD sources is automatically fixed to    Off         When this setting is set to    Off     the Dialogue Normalization  information is not available for Dolby TrueHD sources     Dialogue Normalization   Dialogue Normalization  DialogNorm  is a feature of  Dolby Digital  which is used to keep the programs at the  same average listening level so the user does not have to  change the volume control between Dolby Digital   Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD programs  When  playing back software which has been encoded in Dolby  Digital  Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD   sometimes you may see a brief message in the front  panel display which will read    DialogNorm  X dB     X  being a numeric value   The display is showing how the  program level relates with THX calibration level  If you  want to play the program at calibrated theatrical levels   you may wish to adjust the volume  For example  if you  see the following message     DialogNorm    4 dB    in  the front panel display  to keep the overall output level at  THX calibrated l
132. d in the next section    PTY  Program Type    This allows you to search for RDS radio stations by type   TP  Traffic Program    This allows you to search for RDS radio stations that  broadcast traffic information     Note      In some cases  the text characters displayed on the AV receiver  may not be identical to those broadcast by the radio station  Also   unexpected characters may be displayed when unsupported  characters are received  This is not a malfunction      If the signal from an RDS station is weak  RDS data may be  displayed intermittently or not at all     B Displaying Radio Text  RT     1 Press RT PTY TP once   The RT information scrolls across the AV receiver   s  display   Note      The message    Waiting    may appear while the AV receiver  waits for the RT information      If the message  No Text Data  appears  no RT information  is available     B Finding Stations by Type  PTY   You can search for radio stations by type     1 Press RT PTY TP twice   The current program type appears on the AV  receiver   s display     2 Use PRESET   lt   gt  to select the type of program  you want   See the table shown later in this chapter     3 To start the search  press ENTER   The AV receiver searches until it finds a station of the  type you specified  at which point it stops briefly  before continuing with the search     4 When a station you want to listen to is found  press  ENTER   If no stations are found  the message    Not Found     appears     A En33       Turni
133. dd album to My Library    Marca los   lbumes que se est  n reproduciendo  actualmente    Add playlist to My Library    Marca las listas de reproducci  n que se est  n  reproduciendo actualmente    Add channel to My Channels    Marca las emisoras de Rhapsody que se est  n  reproduciendo actualmente    Add to My Favorites    A  ade una canci  n  emisora o lista de reproducci  n a  la lista Mis favoritos     Consejo      Puede eliminar las canciones  los   lbumes y las emisoras de  Rhapsody marcados de Mi biblioteca     Uso de Sirius XM Internet Radio  solo  Norteam  rica     Su receptor de AV Onkyo incluye una prueba gratuita de  SiriusXM Internet Radio  La pantalla    Account Info     muestra los d  as que quedan de la prueba  Una vez que  termine el periodo de prueba  si desea seguir escuchando  este servicio  deber   contratarlo  para suscribirse vaya a  www siriusxm com internetradio con su ordenador     Cuando se suscriba  recibir   un nombre de usuario y una  contrase  a que deber   introducir en el receptor de AV     Para poder utilizar SiriusXM Internet Radio  el receptor de  AV debe estar conectado a internet  Para usar el mando a  distancia  siga este procedimiento     1 Utilice A V para seleccionar    Sign In     y luego  pulse ENTER   Si ya tiene una cuenta SIRIUS  puede acceder  seleccionando    Sign In     Escriba su nombre de  usuario y contrase  a en la pantalla de teclado que  aparece a continuaci  n o en la configuraci  n web  Si  no sabe su nombre de usuario 
134. deo output  signal from the HDMI output is the one configured in     Component Video Input     1 If you connect your personal computer to PC IN  Analog  RGB   you must assign                to the  PC  input selector   Each HDMI input cannot be assigned to two input  selectors or more  When HDMII   HDMI7 have already  been assigned  you must first set any unused input    selectors to                or you will be unable to assign  HDMI1   HDMI  to other input selectors   Note      If no video component is connected to the HDMI output  even if  the HDMI input is assigned   the AV receiver selects the video  source based on the setting of    Component Video Input         When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector as explained  here  the same HDMI IN will be set as a priority in the    Digital  Audio Input     In this case  if you want to use the coaxial or  optical audio input  make the appropriate selection in the    Audio  Selector    setting   gt  page 64       Do not assign an HDMI IN to the TV CD selector while    HDMI  Control RIHD   is set to    On      gt  page 67   otherwise  appropriate CEC  Consumer Electronics Control  operation will  not be guaranteed      If you assign                  to an input selector that is currently  selected in    HDMI Through      gt  page 67   the    HDMI  Through    setting will be automatically switched to    Off            AUX    is used only for input from the front panel     Component Video Input    If you connect a video com
135. digital interface standard for connecting TVs  projectors   Blu ray Disc DVD players  set top boxes  and other video  components  Until now  several separate video and audio  cables have been required to connect AV components   With HDMI  a single cable can carry control signals   digital video  and up to eight channels of digital audio  2   channel PCM  multichannel digital audio  and  multichannel PCM     The HDMI video stream  i e   video signal  is compatible  with DVI  Digital Visual Interface     so TVs and displays  with a DVI input can be connected by using an HDMI to   DVI adapter cable   This may not work with some TVs and  displays  resulting in no picture     The AV receiver uses HDCP  High bandwidth Digital  Content Protection  2  so only HDCP compatible  components can display the picture        The AV receiver s HDMI interface is based on the  following    Audio Return Channel  3D  x v Color  DeepColor  Lip  Sync  DTS HD Master Audio  DTS HD High  Resolution Audio  Dolby TrueHD  Dolby Digital Plus   DSD and Multichannel PCM     Supported Audio Formats      2 channel linear PCM  32 192 kHz  16 20 24 bit    e Multichannel linear PCM  up to 7 1 ch  32 192 kHz   16 20 24 bit      Bitstream  DSD  Dolby Digital  Dolby Digital Plus   Dolby TrueHD  DTS  DTS HD High Resolution Audio   DTS HD Master Audio    Your Blu ray Disc DVD player must also support the   HDMI output of the above audio formats        En95 Y    Appendix    About Copyright Protection    The AV receive
136. ding down RECEIVER  press and hold  down Q SETUP until the remote indicator lights   about 3 seconds      2 Use the number buttons to enter ID 1  2  or 3   The remote indicator flashes twice     Remote Mode Setup    See    Looking up for Remote Control Codes       gt  page 75      Lock Setup    e     439  gt  setup     gt  081    META Lock Setup    With this preference  you can protect your settings by  locking the setup menus     E Setup      Locked      Unlocked  When    Locked    is selected  the setup menus will be  locked and you cannot change any setting     Multi Zone    In addition to the main listening room  you can also enjoy  playback in the other room  or as we call Multi Zone  And   you can select a different source for each room     Making Multi Zone Connections    There are two ways you can connect Zone speakers   1  Connect them directly to the AV receiver   2  Connect them to an additional amplifier     Connecting Your Zone Speakers Directly to  the AV receiver    This setup allows you to select different sources for Main  room and Zone 2 3  This is called Powered Zone  as the  Zone 2 3 speakers are powered by the AV receiver     To use this setup  you must activate the Powered  Zone 2 3 setting   gt  page 55                                                   Main room                TV     ECS   O               ZONE 2  R                                           Main room                                        MA     ZONE 3  R        ZONE 3 L                 
137. dio    Profile    Puede reproducir pistas de  Recently Listened  Tracks    Library  y  Neighbours    Account Info    Confirme los datos de su cuenta    Sign Out    Se desconecta de su cuenta     3 Utilice A V para seleccionar una emisora y luego  pulse ENTER o  gt  gt  para iniciar la reproducci  n   Se inicia la reproducci  n y aparece la pantalla de  reproducci  n     E Elementos del men     I Love this track    Se guarda la informaci  n sobre la canci  n en el  servidor de Last fm y aumenta la frecuencia con la que  se reproduce    Ban this track    Se guarda la informaci  n sobre la canci  n en el  servidor de Last fm y se reduce la frecuencia con la  que se reproduce    Add to My Favorites    A  ade una emisora a la lista Mis favoritos        Uso del control de scrobbling    Utilice A V para seleccionar    Enable     y luego pulse  ENTER       Los servicios de radio por Internet suministrados por terceros  pueden cancelarse con o sin aviso previo   Es posible que los servicios de radio por Internet no est  n  disponibles en algunas zonas     Uso de Slacker Personal Radio    1    Si no tiene una cuenta  cree una en el sitio web de  Slacker  www slacker com  con su ordenador     Si ya tiene una cuenta de Slacker  seleccione    Sign  in to your account    y pulse ENTER    Aparecer   la pantalla de teclado  Puede introducir  informaci  n desde el mando a distancia o desde el  teclado de la unidad principal     Si no hay errores en la informaci  n que ha  introducido  utilice
138. dio 40029  AVI 70157 Naim 70157 Yamaha 70490  70032  70036 Radiola 40029  Balanced Audio 70157 NSM 70157 Zonda 70157 RCA 40027  Technology Onkyo 71817 Revox 40029           1015  Optimus 70000  70032 CD R Sansui 40029  California Audio Labs   70029  70303 Panasonic 70029  70303 Denon 70626  70766 Sony 40243  Cambridge 70157 Philips 70626  70157 JVC 70072 Thorens 40029  Cambridge Audio 70157 Pioneer 70032  70101 Kenwood 70626 Victor 40244  Carver 70157 Polk Audio 70157 Marantz 70626 Wards 40027  40029  CCE 70157 Primare 70157 Onkyo 71323 Yamaha 40097  Cyr  s 057 Proton 70157 Philips 70626  Denon 70626  70766 QED 70157 Sony 70000 Accessory  DKK 70000 nid 70157       1   81115  DMX Electronics 70157 Quasar 70029 MD Jamo 82228  Dynaco 70157 Radiola 70157 Onkyo 70868 Logitech 82182  Genexxa 70000  70032 RCA 70032 Sony 70490  70000 Onkyo 82990  81993  82351                         y    ley    Remote Control Codes                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     Accessory Satellite Set Top Box Satellite Set Top Box Satellite Set Top Box  Polk Audio 82228 Amstrad 00847  01175  01662  CGV 01413  01567 Durabrand 01284  01693 Chess 01334  01626 Echostar 00775  00853  01323   Video   Accessory Ansonic 02418 CityCom 01
139. dys 12719  Integra 32901  33104 33504 Panasonic 12170  LG 30741 Philips 11454  10556  11394   Microsoft 32083 30539  Onkyo 32901  33104 33504 Powerpoint 10698  Xbox 32083 Prosonic 12001  Pvision 12001   TV DVD Combination RCA 12746  12932  Akai 11675 Schaub Lorenz 12001  Black Diamond 11037  30713 SEG 11037  12719  30713  Blue Sky 11037  30713 Sharp 10818  Bush 11037  10698  12719  Soniq 12493   30713 Sunstech 12001  Centrum      Sylvania 10171  11394  11864   Crown 11037  30713 11886  30630  30675  DMTech 12001 Teac 10698  Dual 11037  30713 Technica 11037  30713  Dynex 12049 Telefunken 10698  Elfunk 11037  30713 Teletech 11037  30713  Emerson 11394  11864  11886  Thomson 10625   3067 5 Toshiba 11524  Ferguson 11037  30713 United 11037  30713  Goodmans 11037  30713 Universum 30713  Grandin 30713 Vestel 11037  Grundig 30539 Viewsonic 12049  H amp B 2 Weltstar 11037  30713  Hanseatic 12001  Hitachi 11037  11667  30713  Insignia 12049  JVC 12271  LG 11423  Logik 11037  30713  Luxor 11037  30713          18    Remote Control Codes    Remote Control Codes    Memo          Y          Y1112 1     C  Copyright 2012 ONKYO SOUND  amp  VISION CORPORATION Japan  All rights reserved       29 4 0 1 0 9 4            
140. e      This linked operation won t work while a video is being played  or when the sound set for the alarm is a built in sound  Beep       This linked operation won t work with models on which music  files cannot be used to set the alarm sound        B Operating Notes     Use the AV receiver   s volume control to adjust the playback  volume      While your iPod iPhone is inserted in the RI Dock  its volume  control has no effect      If you do adjust the volume control on your iPod iPhone while  it   s inserted in the RI Dock  be careful that it   s not set too loud  before you reconnect your headphones     Controlling Your iPod iPhone    By pressing the REMOTE MODE button that   s been  programmed with the remote control code for your Dock   you can control your iPod iPhone in the Dock with the  buttons described further in this section    See    Entering Remote Control Codes    for details on  entering a remote control code   gt  page 76     See the Dock   s instruction manual for more information     RI Dock      Set the RI Dock s RI MODE switch to    HDD    or     HDD DOCK         OSOURCE may not work with a remote control code   without RI   In this case  make an  91 connection and  enter the remote control code 81993  with RD      E With the RI Control  Make an RI connection and enter the remote control code  81993  with RD      Set the AV receiver   s Input Display to DOCK     gt  page 46      Without the RI Control  You must enter the remote control code 82990 first  
141. e  un bot  n REMOTE MODE que se corresponda con la entrada a la cual est   conectado el  componente  Por ejemplo  si conecta un reproductor de CD a la entrada de CD  seleccione   TV CD  cuando introduzca su c  digo de mando a distancia     Antes de que transcurran 30 segundos  utilice los botones num  ricos para   introducir el c  digo de mando a distancia de 5 d  gitos    El bot  n REMOTE MODE indicador Remote parpadear   dos veces    Si el c  digo de mando a distancia no se introduce correctamente  el bot  n REMOTE   MODE indicador Remote parpadear   una vez despacio    Notas        El parpadeo del mando distancia ser   distinto seg  n el modelo de receptor de AV      El mando a distancia est   preconfigurado con los ajustes predeterminados de los distintos  componentes  Al introducir un c  digo de la lista de c  digos del mando a distancia se puede  activar el ajuste predeterminado de ese componente      Cuando hay m  ltiples c  digos relacionados con un fabricante  pruebe a introducirlos uno a uno  hasta que coincida con su componente      Dependiendo del modelo y el a  o de su componente  la compatibilidad no est   garantizada      Con algunos modelos  es posible que el mando a distancia no funcione o que su compatibilidad  est   limitada a una parte de las funciones del componente      Adem  s  no es posible a  adir nuevos c  digos a los ajustes predeterminados existentes del  mando a distancia      Los c  digos de mando a distancia suministrados son correctos en el mom
142. e 10037  Azon        Carad 10668  11037 Denver 10037  11709 Emerson 10178  10171  10037   Baird 10208              10037 Desmet 10037 10714  10668  11394   Bang  amp  Olufsen 10565 Carrefour 10037 Diamant 10037 11864  11886  Barco 10556 Cascade 10037 Diamond 10698 Envision 11365  11506  Epson 11379    11    y          de    Remote Control Codes                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Television Television Television Television  Erres 10037 Genesis 10037 Hisense 10556  10508  10208  ITV 10037  ESA 10171 Genexxa 10037 11363  12098 JGC 11709  ESC 10037 GEM 10171  11864  11886 Hitachi m 10178     Jinfeng 10208  Euroman 10037 Godrej 11585      1 ER nn Tinxing 10556  10037  10698  Europa 10037 Goldfunk 10668 11585  11643  11667  JMB 10556  10634  10499  Europhon 10037 GoldStar 10178  10037  10714  11691  12433 Jubilee 10556  Evesham 11248  11667 10715 Hitachi Fujian 10150 JVC 10650  10653  10508   Excello 11037 Goodmans 10556  10037  10625  Hitec 10698 11428  11601  12271  Exquisit 10037 10714  10560  10668  Hocher 10714 Kaisui 10037  10634  11037  10499   Ferguson 10037  10625  10560  11585  11667 Hornyphon 10037 Karcher 10714  11324  10195  11037  11585        11585 Hugoson 11666 Kathrein 10556  Fidelity 10171  10037  105
143. e and Multiroom Control Kits                             72    Controlling Other Components    iPod iPhone Playback via Onkyo Dock                     73  Using the Onkyo Dock                          de  Controlling Your iPod iPhone        Controlling Other Components                 Preprogrammed Remote Control Codes  Looking up for Remote Control Codes             Entering Remote Control Codes            76  Remapping Colored Buttons                                      76  Remote Control Codes   for Onkyo Components Connected via RI               77  Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons         Ti  Resetting the Remote Controller                 17  Controlling Other                                                       rid    Appendix        Troubleshooting       80  Firmware Update                                         86  Connection Tips and Video Signal Path                    90    Using an RIHD compatible TV  Player    or Recorder         About HDMI                      95  Network USB Features                         96  License and Trademark Information                          99  Specificallolis   obses pb d bina Hnc EU pO DU UR 100            To reset the AV receiver to its factory defaults  turn it  on and  while holding down CBL SAT  press  OON STANDBY   gt  page 80      Features    Amplifier      110 Watts Channel   8 ohms  FTC       170 Watts Channel   6 ohms  IEC       185 Watts Channel   6 ohms  JEITA      WRAT Wide Range Amplifier Technology   5 Hz to 100
144. e first time to    Yes    and    Full  Band    respectively      If you re using THX certified speakers  select    Off THX         Speaker Distance    This setting is set automatically by Audyssey 2EQ Room    Correction and Speaker Setup   gt  page 35         Here you can specify the distance from each speaker to the  listening position so that the sound from each speaker    arrives at the listener   s ears as the sound designer intended     B Unit    gt  feet   Distances can be set in feet  Range  0 5ft to 30 0ft in  0 5 foot steps     gt  meters   Distances can be set in meters  Range  0 15m to  9 00m in 0 15 meter steps     The default setting varies from country to country      E Left  Front Wide Left  Front High Left  Center   Front High Right  Front Wide Right  Right   Surround Right  Surround Back Right  Surround  Back Left  Surround Left  Subwoofer     Specify the distance from each speaker to your   listening position        En 56 Y    Advanced Operations    Note      Speakers that you set to    No    or    None    in     Speaker Configuration    cannot be selected   gt  page 55       When the    Powered Zone 2    setting is set to    Yes    and Zone 2  is turned on  the surround back and front high speakers cannot be  used      When the    Powered Zone 3    setting is set to    Yes    and Zone 3  is turned on  the surround and surround back speakers cannot be  used     Level Calibration    This setting is set automatically by Audyssey 2EQ Room    Correction and Spea
145. e noise GE  7 12  sources for the ultimate in high fidelity  audio reproduction   As the analog video  circuitry is turned off  only video signals DTS ES  input through HDMI IN can be output from    the HDMI output   TEX  Direct In this mode  audio from the input source is    output without surround sound processing          The speaker configuration  presence of  speakers  and speaker distance settings are  enabled  but much of the processing set via  the audio setup is disabled  See    On screen  Setup    for more details   gt  page 48    Stereo Sound is output from the front left and right 2 1  3 1  5 1   ak d subwoofer   DUI speakers and subwoofer  71  Mono Use this mode when watching an old movie  with a mono soundtrack  or use it with the  Mong foreign language soundtracks recorded in the  left and right channels of some movies  It  can also be used with DVDs or other sources  containing multiplexed audio  such as  karaoke DVDs   Multichannel This mode is for use with PCM multichannel  EXA 3 1115 1117 1  Multich dis  DSD 3 In this mode  audio from the input source is 3 115 117 1  output without surround sound processing   DE The speaker configuration  presence of  Dolby Digital speakers   crossover frequency  speaker  Dolby D distance  A V Sync and much of the      processing set via the audio setup are  Dolby Digital Plus     enabled  See    On screen Setup    for more  3 1  5 1  7 1                      details   gt  page 48   3 15 1171   Dolby TrueHD 3 1115 1117 1  D
146. e remote controller at the component   Be sure to enter the appropriate remote control code  first    The entered remote control code may not be correct   If more than one code is listed  try each one     RI Dock for iPod iPhone    E There s no sound    18    11  77    46    75    77    77       Make sure your iPod iPhone is actually playing        Make sure your iPod iPhone is properly inserted in      the Dock     Make sure the AV receiver is turned on  the correct      input source is selected  and the volume is turned up     Make sure the plugs are pushed in all the way       Try resetting your iPod iPhone         E There s no video       Make sure that your iPod iPhone model   s TV OUT      setting is set to On     Make sure the correct input is selected on your TV or      the AV receiver     Some versions of the iPod iPhone do not output      video     E The AV receiver s remote controller doesn t  control my iPod iPhone       Make sure your iPod iPhone is properly inserted in      the Dock  If your iPod iPhone is in a case  it may not  connect properly to the Dock  Always remove your  iPod iPhone from the case before inserting it into the  Dock     The iPod iPhone cannot be operated while it s      displaying the Apple logo   Make sure you    ve selected the right remote mode  74    When you use the AV receiver   s remote controller         point it toward your AV receiver     If you still can t control your iPod iPhone  start      playback by pressing your iPod iPhone
147. e screen appears  The NET  indicator lights  If it flashes  confirm the network  connection   Tip    The same operation can be done by selecting    Network  Service    in the Home menu     Use A W        to select    DLNA     and press ENTER           4 Use A V to select a server  and then press ENTER   The menu is displayed according to the server  functions     Note      The search function does not work with media servers  which do not support this function      Photos and movies stored on a media server cannot be  accessed from the AV receiver      Depending on the sharing settings in the media server  the  AV receiver may not able to access the content  See the  instruction manual of the media server     5 Use A V to select an item  and then press ENTER or   gt  to start playback                 ZZ  My favorite song 1  0 11  Artist name   My favorite album   Note    Depending on the media server    a       I may not   work       If the message    No Item     appears  this means that no  information can be retrieved from the server  In this case   check your server  network  and AV receiver connections     Windows Media Player 11 Setup       This section explains how to configure Windows Media  Player 11 so that the AV receiver can play the music files  stored on your computer     1 Start Windows Media Player 11     2 On the    Library    menu  select    Media Sharing      The    Media Sharing    dialog box appears     3 Select the    Share my media    check box  and then
148. e video of another  This function takes  advantage of the fact that when an audio only input source   PC  TV CD  PHONO  is selected  the video input source  remains unchanged  The following procedure shows how  to listen to a CD player   s audio source connected to  TV CD IN while watching a Blu ray Disc DVD player s  video source connected to BD DVD     1 Press BD DVD     2 Press TV CD   The audio output changes to the CD source  but the  video of previously selected BD DVD is retained    3 Start playback on your Blu Ray Disc DVD and CD  players   You can now enjoy watching your Blu ray Disc DVD  with the sound of your CD player        En34 V    Turning On  amp  Basic Operations    Using Basic Functions    Using the Automatic Speaker Setup    With the supplied calibrated microphone  Audyssey 2EQ    automatically determines the number of speakers  connected  their size for purposes of bass management   optimum crossover frequencies to the subwoofer  if  present   and distances from the primary listening position   Audyssey 2EQ then removes the distortion caused by room  acoustics by capturing room acoustical problems over the  listening area in both the frequency and time domain  The  result is clear  well balanced sound for everyone   Audyssey 2EQ can be used with Audyssey Dynamic EQ    and Audyssey Dynamic Volume     gt  pages 60  61    Before using this function  connect and position all of your  speakers    Audyssey 2EQ offers two ways of measuring  the      Audyssey Quic
149. een information  appears only on a TV that is connected to HDMI  outputs     The vTuner Internet Radio Service is a portal site featuring  radio stations from all over the world    You can search for stations by categories such as genre or  location  The AV receiver is preinstalled with this service     1 Press NET   The network service screen appears  and the NET  indicator lights  If it flashes  verify that the Ethernet  cable is firmly connected to the AV receiver   Tip    The same operation can be done by selecting    Network  Service    in the Home menu     Use        4     to select    vTuner Internet Radio     and then press ENTER     3 Use A V to select a program and then press  ENTER              Playback starts   AS  My Music  0 11  Great Artist  My Favorite  Tip      You can find stations similar to the one being played   During playback  press MENU on the remote controller   select    Stations like this    and press ENTER     B Adding vTuner Internet Radio Stations to  Favorites   There are two ways you can register specific Internet   radio stations  programs  from the vTuner Internet   Radio     Adding to My Favorites  The selected program will be added to    My Favorites     on the network service screen  which appears when  pressing NET on the remote controller   Press MENU with the station selected or while a  station is playing   Use A V to select    Add to My Favorites     and press  ENTER   Use A     lt 4  to select    OK     and press ENTER     Tip    You
150. el   49 8142 4401 0 Fax   49 8142 4208 213  http   www eu onkyo com     China  Hong Kong   Onkyo China Limited   Unit 1033  10 F  Star House  No 3  Salisbury Road  Tsim  Sha Tsui Kowloon  Hong Kong    Tel  852 2429 3118 Fax  852 2428 9039  http   www onkyochina com    Asia  Oceania  Middle East  Africa   Please contact an Onkyo distributor referring to Onkyo  SUPPORT site   http   www intl onkyo com support firmware index html  The above mentioned information is subject to change    without prior notice  Visit the Onkyo web site for the latest  update        A Enso Y    Appendix    Connection Tips and  Video Signal Path    The AV receiver supports several connection formats for  compatibility with a wide range of AV equipment  The  format you choose will depend on the formats supported by  your components  Use the following sections as a guide     The on screen menus appear only on a TV that is  connected to HDMI OUT MAIN  If your TV is  connected to other video outputs  use the AV  receiver   s display when changing settings     Video Connection Formats    Video components can be connected by using any one of  the following video connection formats  composite video   PC IN  Analog RGB   component video  or HDMI  the  latter offering the best picture quality   Tip    For optimal video performance  THX recommends that video  signals pass through the system without upconversion  e g    component video input passing through to component video  output      To by pass the upconver
151. el servicio deseado y pulse ENTER    m   PR  2 22 221 de   Algunos de los servicios no permiten el uso de m  ltiples  Aparecer   la p  gina principal del servicio Brandon 0      Uso de Slacker Personal Radio                      6    seleccionado    Puede guardar hasta 10 cuentas de usuario       Para cambiar entre cuentas debe antes cerrar sesi  n en la  cuenta actual y acceder de nuevo en la pantalla    Users              Es1 Y         Pandora   Internet Radio       Primeros pasos  solo EE UU         Pandora es un servicio de radio por Internet gratuito y  personalizado que reproduce la m  sica que usted conoce y  le ayudar   a descubrir m  sica que le encantar       1 Utilice A V para seleccionar    I have a Pandora    Account    o    Pm new to Pandora    y luego pulse  ENTER    Si no conoce Pandora seleccione    I   m new to  Pandora     Ver   un c  digo de activaci  n en la pantalla  del televisor  Tome nota de este c  digo  Vaya a un  ordenador conectado a Internet y dirija el navegador a  www pandora com onkyo   Introduzca su c  digo de activaci  n y siga las  instrucciones para crear su cuenta de Pandora y sus  emisoras de radio por Internet personalizadas de  Pandora  Puede crear sus propias emisoras  introduciendo sus canciones y artistas favoritos  cuando aparezca la solicitud correspondiente  Una vez  creada su cuenta y sus emisoras  puede regresar al  receptor Onkyo y pulsar Enter para empezar a  escuchar su radio por Internet personalizada de  Pandora    Si ya d
152. elect  Advanced Sharing        4 Check the check box of    Share this folder    and then  click                5 Under    Network File and Folder Sharing     select     Share        6 Select and add    Everyone    from the pull down   menu and then click    Share      Tip     With this setting  everyone is allowed to access the folder   If you want to assign a user name and password to the  folder  make the corresponding settings for    Permissions     in    Advanced Sharing    of the    Sharing    tab      Verify that    Workgroup    is properly set   Note      When using NAS  Network Attached Storage   refer to the  instruction manual provided with your NAS unit     Playing music files on a shared folder    In order to enjoy Home Media  you must first create a  shared folder on your computer     1 On the remote controller  press RECEIVER  followed by NET   The network service screen appears  The NET  indicator lights  If it flashes  confirm the network  connection     Tip    The same operation can be done by selecting    Network    Service    in the Home menu     Use A Y  4    to select    Home Media     and press  ENTER     3 Use A V to select a server  and then press ENTER   Tip    The server name of your computer can be viewed on the  computer properties screen     4 Use A V to select the desired shared folder and then  press ENTER     When asked for a user name and password  enter   the necessary login information   Tip     The login information will be remembered for t
153. emisora que se est   reproduciendo  actualmente de los favoritos    Add song to Library    A  ade la canci  n que se est   reproduciendo  actualmente a su biblioteca    Delete song from Library    Elimina la canci  n que se est   reproduciendo  actualmente de la biblioteca    Add to My Favorites    A  ade una emisora o canci  n a la lista Mis favoritos        Ess Y    Uso de Internet Radio    Y1203 2     C  Copyright 2012 Onkyo Sound  amp  Vision Corporation Japan  All rights reserved      294011898B                  ONKYO    Using Internet Radio    Common Procedures in Internet Radio  Menu    Note      Available services may vary depending on the region     1    Press NET    A list of the network services appears  and the NET  indicator lights  If it flashes  verify that the Ethernet  cable is firmly connected to the AV receiver     Select the desired service and press ENTER   The top page of the selected service appears     Using Multiple Accounts   The AV receiver supports multiple user accounts  which  means you can freely switch between several logins   After registering user accounts  login is performed from  the    Users    screen     1 Press MENU while the Users screen is displayed   The following menu items appear   Add new user   Remove this user     You can either store a new user account  or delete  an existing one     Tip     Some of the services don   t allow the use of multiple user  accounts      You can store up to 10 user accounts      To switch between acco
154. ence level in a home theater  system each speaker level must be adjusted so that      30 dBFS band limited  500 Hz to 2000 Hz  pink noise  produces 75 dB sound pressure level at the listening  position  A home theater system automatically calibrated  by Audyssey 2EQ   will play at reference level when the  master volume control is set to the O dB position  At that  level you can hear the mix as the mixers heard it   Audyssey Dynamic EQ   is referenced to the standard film  mix level  It makes adjustments to maintain the reference  response and surround envelopment when the volume is  turned down from 0 dB  However  film reference level is  not always used in music or other non film content   Audyssey Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset provides  three offsets from the film level reference  5 dB  10 dB   and 15 dB  that can be selected when the mix level of the  content is not within the standard     Note      If    Dynamic EQ    setting is set to    Off     this technology cannot  be used     B Dynamic Volume    gt  Off    gt  Light   Activates Light Compression Mode     gt  Medium   Activates Medium Compression Mode     gt  Heavy   Activates Heavy Compression Mode  This setting  affects volume the most  It quiets the loud parts  such  as explosions  and boosts the quiet parts so they can  be heard     Note      If you want to use Audyssey Dynamic EQ or  Audyssey Dynamic Volume   with THX listening modes  set the     Loudness Plus    setting to    Off    and set    Preserve THX
155. ento de la impresi  n   pero el fabricante puede realizar cambios     Codici del telecomando    1    Tenendo premuto il tasto REMOTE MODE al quale si desidera assegnare il   codice  premere e tenere premuto  DISPLAY   per circa 3 secondi        tasto REMOTE MODE l indicatore Remote si accende    Sui prodotti Integra  i nomi dei tasti sono scritti con l iniziale maiuscola  Ad esempio    tasto    Remote Mode    e tasto    Display       Note       codici di controllo del telecomando non possono essere inseriti per  RECEIVER     i tasti multi  zona      Per  TV     possibile immettere solo codici telecomando del televisore      Tranne che per  RECEIVER    TV   e per il tasto multi zona     possibile assegnare codici di  controllo di ogni categoria per i tasti REMOTE MODE  Tuttavia  tali tasti fungono anche da  tasti del selettore d ingresso  quindi scegliere un tasto REMOTE MODE che corrisponda  all ingresso al quale viene collegato il dispositivo  Per esempio  se si collega il lettore CD  all ingresso CD  scegliere il  TV CD  quando si immette il relativo codice telecomando     Entro 30 secondi utilizzare i tasti numerici per inserire il codice telecomando a 5   cifre    Il tasto REMOTE MODE l indicatore Remote lampeggia due volte    Se il codice telecomando non viene inserito correttamente  il tasto REMOTE   MODE lindicatore Remote lampeggia lentamente una volta    Note      L elemento lampeggiante del telecomando varia a seconda del modello del ricevitore AV      Il telecomand
156. er   por s    mismo lo que significa tener toda la m  sica del mundo al  alcance de sus o  dos  Puede consultar los precios  actualizados y toda la informaci  n que desee en  www last fm subscribe    1 Utilice A V para seleccionar    Sign in to your  account     y luego pulse ENTER   Si ya tiene una cuenta de Last fm  puede acceder a ella  para seleccionar    Sign in to your account      Introduzca su nombre de usuario y contrase  a en la  siguiente pantalla de teclado     E Utilizaci  n de la pantalla de teclado    1  Utilice A     lt 4  gt  y ENTER para introducir su  nombre de usuario y su contrase  a    2  Seleccione  OK     3  Pulse ENTER  Aparecer   la pantalla  Confirm  your entries     4  Pulse ENTER    Aparecer      Please wait     y despu  s la pantalla    Last fm Internet Radio      Consejo      Si desea utilizar m  ltiples cuentas de usuario  consulte    Uso  de m  ltiples cuentas      gt  p  gina 1   Se puede iniciar  sesi  n desde la pantalla    Users        2 Utilice A Y para seleccionar un men   y luego pulse    ENTER    Search Station    Puede buscar emisoras por artista  etiquetas o nombre  de usuario    Top Artists Station    Puede reproducir canciones de los artistas mejor  clasificados    Top Tags Station    Puede reproducir canciones con las etiquetas mejor  clasificadas    Personal Station    Puede reproducir pistas de una emisora personalizada      Your Library        Your Neighbourhood    y    Your  Recommendations          Es5 V    Uso de Internet Ra
157. er 01206  01251  Humax 01377  01176  01427  Logik 01284 Panasat 00879  01433 Schwaiger 01334  01457  01631  01675  01808  01882  Macab 00853 Panasonic 00847  01304  01404  Sedea Electronique 01206  01626  0915  0214  02408 Manhattan 01300 03099 SEG 01251  01284  01626  ID Digital 01176 Maspro 00173 Panda 00173 Servimat 01611  ID Sat 01334 Matsui 00173  01284  01626 Pass 01567 ServiSat 01251  ILLUSION sat 01631 Maximum 01334 peeKTon 01457  02418 Shark 01631  peral 01195  01334 Mediabox 00853 Philips a     j x E Sherwood 01409  Indovision 00887 Mediacom 01206 Dod            Siemens en 01334  01626   mar TIT MediaSat 00853  m UT        Dam 17 Medion 01334  01626 Pus TE Sigmate 02418  MegaSat 01631 SKY 00099  00847  00887   Innova 00099   Pioneer 00853  01308 01175  01662  01693   inVion 02418        a    01611 01850  02754  iotronic 01413 Metz 00173 Premiere 00723 SKY Brazil 00887  ISkyB 00887 Mocha 01251 Pro Basic 00853 SKY Deutschland 02754  ITT 02418 Movistar 02527  02761 Proline 01284 SKY Italia 00853  01693  01850  ITT Nokia 00723 Multichoice 00879  00642  01433  QNS 01404 SKY New Zealand 02211  Jadeworld 00642 02059  02060 RCA 01291 SKY PerfecTV  02299  02616  03099  Jaeger 01334 MySky 01356  01693  01850 Regal 01251 Sky XL 01251  JVC 00775 NEOTION 01334 Roadstar 00853 Sky  01175  01662  KabelBW 01195  01882  01915 Netsat 00099  00887 Rollmaster 01413 Skymaster 01334  01409  01567   Kaon 01300 Nikko 00723 Rownsonic 01567 oter  Kathrein 00173  01561  01567 Nokia 00853  0072
158. er to the following  table and take appropriate action     E Errors during an update via USB          Error Code Description         10    20 The USB device was not detected  Make sure  the USB flash memory or USB cable is  properly connected to the USB port  If the USB  storage device has its own power supply  use it  to power the USB device          14 The firmware file was not found in the root  folder of the USB device  or the firmware file is  for another model  Retry and download the file  on the support page of the web site  following  the on site instructions  If the error persists   please contact Onkyo Support and provide the  error code        Others Retry the update procedure from the beginning   Tf the error persists  please contact Onkyo  Support and provide the error code           Case 2   If an error occurs during the update process  disconnect  then reconnect the AC power cord and try again     Onkyo Sound  amp Vision Corporation  2 1  Nisshin cho  Neyagawa shi  OSAKA 572 8540  JAPAN  http   www onkyo com     The Americas   Onkyo U S A  Corporation   18 Park Way  Upper Saddle River  N J  07458  U S A    For Dealer  Service  Order and all other Business Inquiries   Tel  201 785 2600   Fax  201 785 2650   Hours M F 9am 5pm ET   http   www us onkyo com     For Product Support Team Only   1 800 229 1687   Hours M F 9am 8pm   Sat Sun 10am 8pm ET  http   www us onkyo com     Europe   Onkyo Europe Electronics GmbH  Liegnitzerstrasse 6  82194 Groebenzell  GERMANY  T
159. es   l  ments de menu suivants s   affichent    Add new user    Remove this user    Vous pouvez soit stocker un nouveau compte  utilisateur  soit en supprimer un existant     Conseil      Certains des services ne permettent pas l utilisation de  plusieurs comptes utilisateur      Vous pouvez stocker jusqu    10 comptes utilisateur      Pour commuter entre les comptes  vous devez d abord vous  d  connecter du compte actuel  puis vous reconnectez depuis  l   cran    Users              Fri V    Utilisation d une webradio    Pandora  internet Radio  Pour commencer       tats Unis uniquement                      Utilisation de Rhapsody  Etats Unis                                                                  Utilisation de SiriusXM Internet Radio     Am  rique du Nord uniquement        Utilisation de la webradio Last fm           Utilisation de Slacker Personal Radio    Pandora   internet Radio       Pour commencer    tats Unis  uniquement        Pandora est un service de radio en ligne libre et  personnalis   vous permettant de lire la musique que vous  connaissez et de d  couvrir celle que vous aimez     1 Utilisez A V pour s  lectionner    I have a Pandora    Account    ou    Pm new to Pandora     puis appuyez  sur ENTER    Si vous ne connaissez pas Pandora s  lectionnez    I   m  new to Pandora     Un code d activation apparaitra  sur l   cran de votre t  l  viseur  Notez ce code  Utilisez  un ordinateur branch   sur Internet et connectez le  navigateur    www pandora com o
160. et  automatically after the Audyssey 2EQ   Room   Correction and Speaker Setup has been performed     Bi Noise can be heard          When you play source material that contains no      information in the LFE channel  the subwoofer  produces no sound     Make sure the speakers are configured correctly  55    Bi There s no sound with a certain signal format       Check the digital audio output setting on the      connected device  On some game consoles  such as   those that support DVD  the default setting is off    With some DVD Video discs  you need to select an       audio output format from a menu     Depending on the input signal  some listening modes 38 44  cannot be selected        Can t select the Pure Audio listening mode    Using cable ties to bundle audio cables with power       cords  speaker cables  and the like may degrade the  audio performance  so refrain from doing it     An audio cable may be picking up interference  Try       repositioning your cables     E The Late Night function doesn t work          The Pure Audio listening mode cannot be selected      while Zone 2 3 is on        Ens   V    Make sure the source material is Dolby Digital  50  Dolby Digital Plus  and Dolby TrueHD   Make sure that the    TrueHD Loudness 59    Management  setting is not set to  Off   The Late  Night function doesn t work when this setting is  disabled        About DTS signals    When DTS program material ends and the DTS      bitstream stops  the AV receiver remains in DTS  li
161. et d ajouter la piste en cours de lecture    votre  biblioth  que    Delete song from Library     Permet de supprimer la piste en cours de lecture de  votre biblioth  que    Add to My Favorites     Permet d ajouter une station ou un morceau    la liste  My Favorites        Fre V    Utilisation d une webradio    Uso de Internet Radio    Uso de Internet Radio    Pandora   Internet Radio    Primeros pasos    Uso de m  ltiples cuentas    El receptor de AV permite m  ltiples cuentas de usuario   solo EEUU   rues sacra              2  Procedimientos comunes en el men   lo que quiere decir que se puede cambiar libremente  Internet Radio entre varios usuarios  Despu  s de registrar las cuentas de   usuario  el acceso se realiza desde la pantalla    Users     Uso de Rhapsody  s  lo                                3    1 Pulse MENU cuando aparezca la pantalla de  usuarios   Aparecer  n los siguientes elementos del men     Add new user     Nota      Los servicios disponibles pueden variar de una regi  n a otra   Uso de SiriusXM Internet Radio  solo    1 Pulse NET    Norteam  rica                                              4        a Remove this user    Aparecer   una lista de los servicios de red y se     Pe      M Puede guardar una nueva cuenta de usuario o borrar   iluminar   el indicador NET  Si parpadea  verifique     28 una existente   que el cable Ethernet est   firmemente conectado al Uso de Last fm Internet Radio                        5  receptor de AV   Consejo  2 Seleccione 
162. etting varies depending on the media server or  controller devices  Refer to your devices  instruction  manual for details    If the operating system of your personal computer is  Windows 7  Windows Media Player 12 is already installed   For more information  see the Microsoft web site        En 97 Y    Appendix    USB Device Requirements      USB mass storage device class  but not always  guaranteed       FAT16 or FAT32 file system format      If the storage device has been partitioned  each section  will be treated as an independent device      Up to 20 000 folders can be displayed  and folders may  be nested up to 16 levels deep      USB hubs and USB devices with hub functions are not  supported     Note      If the media you connect is not supported  the message    No  Storage    will be displayed      If you connect a USB hard disk drive to the AV receiver   s USB  port  we recommend that you use its AC adapter to power it      The AV receiver supports USB MP3 players that support the  USB Mass Storage Class standard  which allows USB devices to  be connected to computers without the need for special drivers or  software  Note that not all USB MP3 players support the USB  Mass Storage Class standard  Refer to your USB MP3 player   s  instruction manual for details      Protected WMA music files on an MP3 player cannot be played      Onkyo accepts no responsibility whatsoever for the loss or  damage to data stored on a USB device when that device is used  with the AV rece
163. evue     Auto Standby       Bi Auto Standby      Off      On  When    Auto Standby    is set to    On     the AV receiver  will automatically enter standby mode if there is no  operation for 30 minutes with no audio and no video signal  input      Auto Standby    will appear on the AV receiver   s display  and OSD 30 seconds before the Auto Standby comes on   Default setting  On  European  Australian and Asian  models   Off  North American and Taiwanese models     Note      Set to    On     the Auto Standby function may activate itself during  playback with some sources     The Auto Standby function does not work when Zone 2 3 is on     Network    After modifying the network settings  you must confirm    the changes by executing  Save         This section explains how to configure the AV receiver s  network settings manually    If your router s DHCP server is enabled  you don t need to  change any of these settings  as the AV receiver is set to  use DHCP to configure itself automatically by default  i e    DHCP is set to    Enable      If  however  your router s       En 68 Y    Advanced Operations    DHCP server is disabled  you re for example using static  IP   you ll need to configure these settings yourself  in  which case  a knowledge of Ethernet networking is  essential    What s DHCP    DHCP  Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol  is used by  routers  computers  the AV receiver  and other devices to  automatically configure themselves on a network   What s DNS    The DNS
164. ez sur ENTER ou  gt  gt  pour d  marrer la lecture   La lecture d  bute et l   cran de lecture s affiche     E El  ments du menu   I Love this track     L information de la piste est sauvegard  e dans le  serveur Last fm  et la fr  quence de lecture augmente   Ban this track     L information de la piste est sauvegard  e dans le  serveur Last fm  et la fr  quence de lecture diminue   Add to My Favorites     Permet d ajouter une station    la liste My Favorites     B Utilisation du contr  le Scrobbling    Utilisez A V pour s  lectionner    Enable     puis appuyez  sur ENTER       Les services de webradio fournis par un tiers peuvent   tre  r  sili  s avec ou sans pr  avis   Les services de webradio peuvent ne pas   tre accessibles dans  certaines zones     Utilisation de Slacker Personal Radio    1    Si vous ne poss  dez pas de compte  cr  ez en un     partir du site Web de Slacker  www slacker com      l   aide de votre ordinateur     Si vous poss  dez d  j   un compte Slacker   s  lectionnez    Sign in to your account     puis  appuyez sur ENTER    L     cran clavier s   affiche  Pouvez saisir des  informations    partir de la t  l  commande ou des  touches sur l   appareil principal     Si les informations que vous avez saisies ne  comportent pas d erreur  utilisezA V  lt     pour  s  lectionner    OK     puis appuyez sur ENTER   L     cran de confirmation des informations du compte  s   affiche     Si vous ne poss  dez pas de compte  s  lectionnez     Access without Sign 
165. f the fuse needs  to be replaced  the replacement fuse must approved by  ASTA or BSI to BS 1362 and have the same ampere rating  as that indicated on the plug  Check for the ASTA mark or  the BSI mark on the body of the fuse    If the power cord   s plug is not suitable for your socket  outlets  cut it off and fit a suitable plug  Fit a suitable fuse  in the plug     For European Models       Declaration of Conformity    We  ONKYO EUROPE  ELECTRONICS GmbH  LIEGNITZERSTRASSE 6   82194 GROEBENZELL   GERMANY    declare in own responsibility  that the ONKYO product  described in this instruction manual is in compliance with the  corresponding technical standards such as EN60065   EN55013  EN55020 and EN61000 3 2   3 3     GROEBENZELL  GERMANY    K  MIYAGI  ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH             A En4 V    Safety Information and Introduction    Supplied Accessories    Make sure you have the following accessories        Indoor FM antenna   gt  page 19        AM loop antenna   gt  page 19        Power cord  European  Australian  Asian and  Taiwanese models    gt  page 19        Speaker cable labels   gt  page 13        Speaker setup microphone   gt  page 36        Remote controller  RC 836M  and two batteries  AA R6    Note for China  The battery for the remote controller is not  supplied for this unit         Quick Start Guide         In catalogs and on packaging  the letter at the end of the product  name indicates the color  Specifications and operations are the  same regardle
166. f you re using a  center speaker  the center channel sound is output from  only the center speaker   If you re not using a center  speaker  the center channel sound will be distributed to the  front left and right speakers to create a phantom center    This setting controls the front left  right  and center mix   allowing you to adjust the weight of the center channel  sound     E PL 112 Height Gain      Low    gt  Mid    gt  High  The Height Gain Control in Dolby Pro Logic IIz enables  the listener to select how much gain is applied to the front  high speakers  There are three settings   Low      Mid    and     High     and the front high speakers are accentuated in that  order  While  Mid  is the default listening setting  the  listener may adjust the Height Gain Control to their  personal preference     Note      If the    Front High    setting is set to    None      gt  page 55   this  setting cannot be selected      If the  Powered Zone 2    setting is set to    Yes    and Zone 2 is  turned on  this setting cannot be selected     E Dolby EX   gt  Auto   If the source signal contains a Dolby EX flag  the  Dolby EX or THX Surround EX listening mode is  used      Manual   You can select any available listening mode   This setting determines how Dolby EX encoded signals are  handled  This setting is unavailable if no surround back    speakers are connected  This setting is effective with    Dolby Digital  Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD only     Note       f the  Surroun
167. g is active                 Cinema   Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height   THX  Music   Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height   THX  Games   The combination of Dolby Pro Logic    gt   Height and THX Cinema Music Games  modes can be used    The PLIIz and THX indicators light on the  AV receiver s display        Blei   op         ES     A  pi E  m  Xo  e              En 43 Y       Listening Mode    Description    Turning On  amp  Basic Operations    Speaker Note    Layout 4       THX S2 Cinema    THX S2 Music    THX S2 Games    THX Surr EX      DTS Neo 6 Cinema   THX Cinema    DTS Neo 6 Music   THX Music    5 171         DTS Neo 6   THX Cinema    DTS Neo 6   THX Music    2         DTS Neo 6   THX Games  3  The combination of DTS Neo 6 and THX  Cinema Music Games modes can be used   4  The Neo 6 and THX indicators light on the  5  AV receiver   s display   6    THX Select2 Cinema  7  This mode expands 5 1 channel sources for  8    7 1  channel playback  It does this by  analyzing the composition of the surround  source  optimizing the ambient and  directional sounds to produce the surround  back channel output    THX Select2 Music   This mode is designed for use with music   It expands 5 1 channel sources for 7 1   channel playback    THX Select2 Games   This mode is designed for use with video  games  It can expand 5 1 channel sources  for 6 1 7 1 channel playback     Pure Audio cannot be selected when Zone 2 3 is active    Besides  if you activate Zone 2 3 while Pure Audio is selected  the listen
168. g the settings  press  ENTER        2EQ  Auto Setup           AUDYSSEY   Speakers Type Front  Normal  lt  gt   Powered Zone 2 No  Powered Zone 3 No          Perform the    Speaker Setup    according to your  speaker configuration        Speakers Type Front    gt  page 55        Powered Zone 2   gt  page 55        Powered Zone 3   page 55     4 Use A V to select    Audyssey Quick Start    or     Audyssey 2EQ Full Calibration     and then press  ENTER     5 Press ENTER   Audyssey 2EQ   Room Correction and Speaker Setup  starts   Test tones are played through each speaker as  Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup  runs  This process takes a few minutes  Please refrain  from talking during measurements and do not stand  between speakers and the microphone   Do not disconnect the speaker setup microphone  during Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker  Setup  unless you want to cancel the setup   Tf you select    Audyssey Quick Start     you will go to  step 8    6 Place the speaker setup microphone at the next  position  and then press ENTER   Audyssey 2EQ performs more measurements  This  takes a few minutes     7 When prompted  repeat step 6     8 Use A Y to select an option  and then press ENTER        2EQ  Auto Setup                        CES     Review Speaker Configuration     Subwoofer Yes  Front 100Hz  Center 40Hz a  Surround 100Hz     gt   Front Wide None  Front High None  Surround Back 120Hz 8 E 8    Surround Back Ch 2ch 8      Save  Cancel             The op
169. gabe wird  verringert    Add to My Favorites    F  gt einen Sender zu meiner My Favorites Liste  hinzu     B Scrobbling Steuerung verwenden    Verwenden Sie A V  um    Enable    auszuw  hlen und dann  dr  cken Sie ENTER       Von Drittparteien zur Verf  gung gestellte Internetradio Dienste  k  nnen unter Umst  nden ohne Vorank  ndigung eingestellt  werden    In bestimmten Gebieten sind Internetradio Dienste eventuell  nicht verf  gbar     Y1112 1      2940122 9               Remote Control Codes    DISPLAY    O    Remote Control Codes    1 While holding down the REMOTE MODE button to which you want to assign a    code  press and hold down  DISPLAY   about 3 seconds     The REMOTE MODE button Remote indicator lights    On Integra products  button names are capitalized  For example     Remote Mode      button and    Display    button    Notes      Remote control codes cannot be entered for  RECEIVER  and the multi zone button      Only TV remote control codes can be entered for  TV       Except for  RECEIVER    TV   and the multi zone button  remote control codes from any  category can be assigned for the REMOTE MODE buttons  However  these buttons also work  as input selector buttons  so choose a REMOTE MODE button that corresponds with the input  to which you connect your component  For example  if you connect your CD player to the CD  input  choose  TV CD  when entering its remote control code     Within 30 seconds  use the number buttons to enter the 5 digit remote control 
170. gle close  to one of the two available settings     Front left speaker O Front right speaker    228 Listening angle  30      Y    Note      For best results  we recommend setting    Narrow    to 20  and     Wide    to 40       LFE Level       Dolby Digital  DTS   Multich PCM  Dolby  TrueHD  DTS HD Master Audio  DSD     gt     codB   20dB   10dB       0dB  With these settings  you can set the level of the LFE  Low  Frequency Effects  channel individually for each input  sources   If you find that low frequency effects are too loud when  using one of these sources  change the setting to  20 dB or     co dB    1 Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus sources     2 DTS and DTS HD High Resolution sources   8 DSD  Super Audio CD  sources    T ga    2  2t E  Setup  2      MainMenu   Source Setup    Items can be set individually for each input selector        Preparation  Press the input selector buttons to select an input source        Audyssey      The tone for each speaker is set automatically by  Audyssey 2EQ   Room Correction and Speaker Setup   To enable the following settings  you must first perform  the Room Correction and Speaker Setup   gt  page 35        These technologies cannot be used when        a pair of headphones is connected  or     either Pure Audio or Direct listening mode is selected        B Audyssey    gt  Off    gt  Movie   Select this setting for movie material   The Audyssey indicator will light     gt  Music   Select this setting for music material   The Aud
171. hannel that you don   t want to output    gt  page 55    SB   Surround Back  FH   Front High  FW   Front Wide                      Power amplifier    About AV Connections    Connecting AV components    HDMI cable       Video  amp  Audio    AV receiver    TV  projector  etc                                                                                                                                                     e LLLI  Blu ray Disc   DVD player Game console  Other cables      Video   Audio  TV  projector  etc           ES On  Blu ray Disc   DVD player Game console     1 If your TV doesn   t support Audio Return Channel  ARC   you  need to connect an optical digital cable together with the  HDMI cable to the AV receiver      Before making any AV connections  read the manuals   supplied with your AV components      Don   t connect the power cord until you    ve completed and   double checked all AV connections       Push plugs in all the way to make  good connections  loose connections  can cause noise or malfunctions       To prevent interference  keep audio  and video cables away from power  cords and speaker cables        AV Cables and Jacks    B HDMI  HDMI connections can carry digital video and audio     HDMI          e      E Component video   Component video separates the luminance  Y  and color  difference signals  PB  PR   providing the best picture  quality  some TV manufacturers label their component  video sockets slightly differently      Y Y    Green    E A
172. hanson  de la station courante    Why is this song playing      D  couvrez certains des attributs musicaux que  Pandora utilise pour cr  er vos stations radio  personnelles    Don t play the song for a month     Si vous en avez assez d une chanson  vous pouvez  mettre la chanson    au repos    et Pandora ne la lira  plus pendant un mois    Create station from this artist      Permet de cr  er une station radio    partir de cet artiste        Fr2 V    Utilisation d une webradio    Delete this station     Ceci supprimera de facon permanente la station de  votre compte Pandora  Au cas o   vous d  cideriez de  r  cr  er la station avec les m  mes chansons ou les  m  mes artistes  tous vos acceptations rejets pr  c  dents  seront perdus    Create station from this song     Permet de cr  er une station radio    partir de cette  chanson    Rename this station     Vous permet de renommer la station radio actuelle   Bookmark this artist     Pandora marquera votre artiste pr  f  r   pour votre  profil sur www pandora com    Bookmark this song     Pandora marquera la chanson en cours et vous  permettra de toutes les acheter sur Amazon ou iTunes  en une   tape     Add to My Favorites     Permet d ajouter une station    la liste My Favorites     PANDORA    internet radio  PANDORA  le logo PANDORA  et l   habillage  commercial Pandora sont des marques commerciales ou  des marques d  pos  es de la soci  t   Pandora Media  Inc   Utilis  es avec autorisation     Utilisation de Rhapsody  Etats
173. he THX  listening mode is selected     Preserve THX Settings     Yes      No  Tf this setting is set to    Yes     Dynamic EQ and Dynamic  Volume have no effect in THX listening mode     Note      This setting is fixed at    Yes    if    Loudness Plus    is set to    On        E Metadata Compatible      On   When Metadata Compatible is set to    On     valid  metadata is transmitted via the HDMI connections   and can be used by other devices in the system       Off   When Metadata Compatible is set to    Off     metadata  is not transmitted via the HDMI connections          be continued    5       The HDMI connection in your system is used to deliver  uncompressed digital audio and video information from  one device to the next  There is also additional information  about this digital content that can be delivered  Such  additional information is referred to as    metadata      Metadata Compatible mode should be used when there are  home theater components in your system  such as Blu ray  disc players  set top boxes and displays that use this  additional metadata  For example  Metadata Compatible  mode should be set to ON when there are THX Media  Director    Enabled devices in the system  This ensures  that this additional information can be received by your  Onkyo AVR and can be sent to other devices that are  connected in your home theater system  with no  interruption     THX Loudness Plus   THX Loudness Plus is a new volume control technology  featured in THX Ultra  Plus
174. he front panel USB input is compatible with  iPod iPhone       MHL Enabled AUX Front Input    Miscellaneous      40 FM AM Presets     Audyssey 2EQ   to correct room acoustic problems     Audyssey Dynamic EQ  for loudness correction     Audyssey Dynamic Volume  to maintain optimal  listening level and dynamic range     Crossover Adjustment   40 50 60 70 80 90 100 120 150 200 Hz      A V Sync Control Function  up to 800 ms      Auto Standby Function     On Screen Display via HDMI   e Preprogrammed fRI Compatible Remote       En7 V    Safety Information and Introduction    Front  amp  Rear Panels    Front Panel     North American and Taiwanese models     Safety Information and Introduction     European  Australian and Asian models                                B O    D    For detailed information  see the pages in parentheses    D   ON STANDBY button  20     2 ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 buttons  47  71     8 Remote control sensor  5      Display  9       LISTENING MODE buttons  38        DIMMER button  North American and Taiwanese  models   46       MEMORY button  32   TUNING MODE button  32     SETUP button  51                 TUNING       32   PRESET  lt   gt   32   cursor and  ENTER buttons      RETURN button     MASTER VOLUME control and indicator  23       PURE AUDIO button and indicator  38   PHONES jack  47        AUX INPUT HDMI MHL jack  16    TONE and Tone Level buttons  49      Input selector buttons  23    DISPLAY button  46    VIDEO jack  17     A Ens V    ONKYO             
175. he next time  you log in      The login information is that of the user account set when  creating a shared folder    6 Use A V to select a music file and then press ENTER  or  gt    The playback of the selected file starts        En31 V    Turning On  amp  Basic Operations    Listening to AM FM Radio    This section describes the procedure of using the  buttons on the front panel  unless otherwise specified     Using the Tuner    With the built in tuner you can enjoy AM and FM radio  stations  You can store your favorite stations as presets for  quick selection    You can also change the frequency steps   gt  page 66      1 Press TUNER to select either    AM    or    FM      In this example  FM has been selected     Band Frequency              Actual display depends on the country      Tuning into Radio Stations    Bi Auto tuning mode    1  2    Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO indicator  lights on the AV receiver   s display     Press TUNING A V   Searching stops when a station is found     When tuned into a station  the TUNED indicator  lights  When tuned into a stereo FM station  the FM  STEREO indicator lights as shown      gt  TUNED 4  AUTO    REO    FM STEREO                Tip     Tuning into weak FM stereo stations  Tf the signal from a stereo FM station is weak  it may be  impossible to get good reception  In this case  switch to  manual tuning mode and listen to the station in mono     E Manual tuning mode  In manual tuning mode  FM stations will be in mono     1
176. he remote controller   For buttons that can be operated   page 78      Note      Audio from DVD Audio or Super Audio CD may not output  from the TV speakers  You will be able to output the audio  from the TV speakers by setting the audio output of the  DVD player to 2ch PCM   It may not be possible depending  on the player models     Even if you set to output audio on the TV speakers  audio  will be output from the speakers connected to the AV  receiver when you adjust the volume or switch the input on  the AV receiver  To output audio from the TV speakers  re   do the corresponding operations on the TV    In case of an UHD connection with RI and RI audio  control compatible components  do not connect the RI  cable at the same time    On the TV  when you select anything other than the HDMI  jack to which the AV receiver is connected  the input on the  AV receiver will be switched to    TV CD       The AV receiver will automatically power on in conjunction  when it determines it to be necessary  Even if the AV    receiver is connected to an      compatible TV or  player recorder  it will not power on if it is not necessary  It  may not power on in conjunction when the TV is set to  output audio from the TV    Linked functions with the AV receiver may not work  depending on the component model connected  In such  cases  operate the AV receiver directly     About HDMI    Designed to meet the increased demands of digital TV   HDMI  High Definition Multimedia Interface  is a new  
177. he same time     Front high Front wide    right right Front right                                                          Surround    Surround  right back right    Connecting the Speaker Cables    The following illustration shows how to connect the  speakers to each pair of terminals  If you   re using only one  surround back speaker  connect it to the SURR BACK L  terminals     Tip    You can specify whether surround back  front high  or front wide  speakers are connected in the    Speaker Configuration    menu      page 55  or during Audyssey 2EQ   Room Correction and  Speaker Setup   gt  page 35         Eni2 Y       Connections    Front wide Front high    Front left left left                                                 Surround Surround  back left left    Bi Screw type speaker terminals   Strip 1 2  to 5 8   12 to 15 mm  of insulation from the ends  of the speaker cables  and twist the bare wires tightly  as  shown     1 2  to 5 8   12 to 15 mm       2  gt   amp    lt    gt eE    E Banana Plugs  North American models     If you are using banana plugs  tighten the speaker  terminal before inserting the banana plug          Do not insert the speaker code directly into the center    hole of the speaker terminal     Attaching the Speaker Cable Labels    The speaker terminals are color coded for identification  purpose        Speaker Color       Front left  Front high left  Front wide left    White  Zone 2 left  Zone 3 left       Front right  Front high right  Front wide  
178. he service   you must subscribe  To subscribe go to  www siriusxm com internetradio with your computer     When you subscribe  you will be provided with a username  and password which has to be entered into the AV receiver     To use SiriusXM Internet Radio  you must have your AV  receiver connected to the Internet  Using the remote  control  follow these steps     1 Use A F to select    Sign In   and then press ENTER     Tf you have an existing SIRIUS account  you can sign  in by selecting    Sign In     Enter your user name and  password in the next keyboard screen  or in Web  Setup  If you don   t know your username or password   call Sirius XM at  888  539 7474 for assistance     Tip    If you want to use multiple user accounts  see    Using    Multiple Accounts      gt  page 1   Login can be made from  the    Users    screen     B Using the keyboard screen   1  Use A V  lt     and ENTER to enter your user  name and password    2  Select    OK       3  Press ENTER  The    Confirm your entries     screen appears    4  Press ENTER       Please wait       appears and then    SiriusXM   Internet Radio    screen appears which displays the   category available for selection     2 Use A V to select the category and then press    ENTER   The channel list screen for the selected category  appears     3 Use A Y to select the desired channel and then press    ENTER    The playback screen for the selected channel appears  and you can listen to SiriusXM Internet Radio    You can contr
179. hone  the AV receiver  remembers the current mode  This means that if you  disconnect when in Extended Mode  Music   the AV    receiver will start in Extended Mode  Music  the next time  you connect the iPod iPhone     Use A Y to select a folder  and then press ENTER to  open it    Tip    You can also use the A V  ENTER and TUNING MODE    buttons on the front panel  TUNING MODE allows you to  switch modes     Use A V to select a music video file  and press  ENTER or B   to start playback     Note      While the message  Connecting     appears on the AV receiver s    display  do not disconnect the USB cable supplied with your  iPod iPhone or the USB device from the USB port       If you connect an iPod or iPhone to the USB port  no sound will    be output from the headphones jack     Extended Mode  Music  Control    The music content information is displayed  lists are  displayed   and you can control the music content while  looking at the screen    Top screen list    Playlists  Artists  Albums  Genres  Songs  Composers   Shuffle Songs  Now Playing     Note       n this mode  video contents are not displayed  even if they are  input from the VIDEO jack on the AV receiver   s front panel     Extended Mode  Video  control    The video content information is displayed  lists are  displayed   and you can control the video content while  looking at the screen    Top screen list    Movies  Music Videos  TV Shows  Video Podcasts   Rentals     Note     To view the video contents of y
180. i  n  Sirius  XM y todas las marcas y  logotipos relacionados son marcas comerciales de Sirius  XM Radio Inc  y sus filiales  Todos los derechos  reservados     Uso de Last fm Internet Radio    Last fm es un servicio musical que sabe lo que le gusta     Su nuevo receptor de AV Onkyo es muy inteligente  Si  tiene una cuenta gratuita de Last fm  har   un seguimiento  de todas las canciones que acaba de escuchar  Cuando  visite el sitio web de Last fm  podr   ver listas personales de  la m  sica que ha disfrutado  compartirlas con sus amigos y  tambi  n ver lo que les gusta a ellos     Con sus miles de biograf  as  cr  ticas y una infinita variedad  de emisoras de radio personalizadas y sin publicidad   Last fm es una forma excelente de descubrir m  sica  Cree  hoy mismo una cuenta gratuita de Last fm en  www last fm join    Si se suscribe podr   disfrutar de lo mejor de Last fm Radio  sin anuncios en su receptor de AV Onkyo sin necesidad de  un ordenador    Recommended Radio    Descubra nuestras interesantes recomendaciones  personalizadas que se adaptan a sus gustos en cada  momento    Artist Radio    Escoja cualquier artista y podr   escuchar una emisora de  radio inspirada exclusivamente en su elecci  n    My Library    Rel  jese y disfrute de selecciones de toda la m  sica que ha  escuchado desde que se registr   en Last fm    Tag Radio      Polish funk    Death pop  Piense en un estilo y podr    escucharlo durante horas     Pru  belo gratis ahora mismo  Cree una cuenta y v
181. i Can t turn on the AV receiver       Make sure that the power cord is properly plugged      into the wall outlet     Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet  wait five      seconds or more  then plug it in again     E The AV receiver turns off unexpectedly       The AV receiver will automatically enter standby 68  mode when Auto Standby has been set and launches     E The AV receiver turns off and after restoring the  power  it turns off again       The protection circuit has been activated  Remove      13  power cord from the wall outlet immediately  Make  sure that all speaker cables and input sources are  properly connected  and leave the AV receiver with  its power cord disconnected for 1 hour  After that   reconnect the power cord and turn the power on  If  the AV receiver turns off again  unplug the power  cord and contact your Onkyo dealer    Caution  If    CHECK SP WIRE  appears on the AV  receiver s display  the speaker cables may be  shorting     WARNING  If smoke  smell or abnormal noise is produced by the AV    receiver  unplug the power cord from the wall outlet  immediately and contact your Onkyo dealer           En 80 Y    Appendix    Bi There s no sound  or it s very quiet       Make sure that the digital input source is selected 54  properly    Make sure that all audio connecting plugs are pushed 15  in all the way    Make sure that the inputs and outputs of all 16 18  components are connected properly    Make sure that the polarity of the speaker cables 
182. ich mit Ihrem Musikgeschmack ver  ndern    Artist Radio    W  hlen Sie einen beliebigen Interpreten und wir spielen  f  r Sie einen ganzen Radiosender mit durch Ihre Wahl  inspirierter Musik    My Library    Lehnen Sie sich zur  ck und erfreuen Sie sich an einer  Auswahl aller Musik  die Sie seit Ihrer Mitgliedschaft bei  Last fm geh  rt haben    Tag Radio    Polish Funk  Death Pop  Denken Sie an einen Musikstil  und wir unterhalten Sie stundenlang damit     Starten Sie Ihr kostenloses Probeabo direkt wenn Sie Ihr  Konto erstellen und finden Sie selbst heraus wie es ist   jederzeit die Musik der ganzen Welt abrufen zu k  nnen   Die aktuellen Nutzungspreise und umfassende Infos sind  unter www last fm subscribe erh  ltlich    SN 29401229    1 Verwenden Sie A V  um    Sign in to your account     auszuw  hlen und dann dr  cken Sie ENTER   Wenn Sie   ber einen bestehenden Last fm Konto  verf  gen  k  nnen Sie sich anmelden und    Sign in to  your account    w  hlen  Geben Sie Ihre Ihre  Benutzernamen und das Kennwort in der folgenden  Tastaturanzeige ein     Bi Verwendung der Tastaturanzeige    1  Verwenden Sie A     lt   und den ENTER  um  Ihren Nutzernamen und Passwort einzugeben    2  W  hlen Sie               3  Dr  cken Sie ENTER  Die Anzeige   Confirm  your entries    erscheint    4  Dr  cken Sie ENTER       Please wait       wird angezeigt und danach erscheint   die   Last fm Internet Radio    Anzeige     Tipp     Falls Sie mehrere Nutzerkonten verwenden m  chten   schlage
183. ided       Be careful not to short the positive and negative wires     Doing so may damage the AV receiver     Make sure the metal core of the wire does not have    contact with the AV receiver   s rear panel  Doing so may    damage the AV receiver          Don   t connect more than one cable to each speaker  terminal  Doing so may damage the AV receiver     Don   t connect one speaker to several terminals              A En13 Y    Connections                            u        2          CJ                                                                      v Y Y    22        SN Mw     NY NA            ra rN  IN IN   te alt   Y Y             MM                                                  gt        You can use dipole speakers for the surround and surround  back speakers  Dipole speakers output the same sound in  two directions    Dipole speakers typically have an arrow printed on them to  indicate how they should be positioned  The surround  dipole speakers  a  should be positioned so that their  arrows point toward the TV screen  while the surround  back dipole speakers  b  should be positioned so that their  arrows point toward each other  as shown     5       Using Powered Subwoofers             Ml                                                                                                               LINE INPUT   Ao    SO    23 iS IO    ONCE         LINE INPUT    G  tE    Powered subwoofer    Y            1 3 of wall  position    To find the best position for y
184. igisky 01457 Gold Box 00853  Onkyo 52503 British Sky 00847  01175  01662 DigitalBox 01100  01631 Gold Vision 01631  HE Broadcasting Digiwave 01631 GoldMaster 01334  m EE BskyB 00847  01175  01662 DirecTV 01377  00099 Goodmans 01284  01291   Sky 01334 Bush ets 01291  01626  Dish Network 00775 Gradiente 00099  00887  Addition 01284 Canal Digital 00853 01334 Dishpro 00775 Grandin 01626  ADB 00642  00887  01259 Cansa ae  ue DishTV 01300 Grocos 01409  01457         01626 men                  DRE 01176 Grundig 00847  00853  00173   d Dream Multimedia 01237 00879  01284  01291  Alba 01284 CanalSat 00853  02657 DSE 02280  02418 Haier 02418  an BM               DSTV 00879  00642  01433 Hallo 01626                y            Remote Control Codes                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Satellite Set Top Box Satellite Set Top Box Satellite Set Top Box Satellite Set Top Box  Hama 01567 Leiko 01626 Pace 00847  00853  00887  Sat Industrie 01611  Hanseatic 01100 Lemon 01334 01175  01323  01356  SAT  01409  Hirschmann 00173 Lenoxx 01611 Dien E e Satplus 01100  Hitachi 01284 Linsar 01284 02211  02657 SatyCon 01631  Hornet 01300 Listo 01626 Pacific 01284 Schaub Lorenz 02418  HTS 00775 Lodos 01284 Palcom 01409  01611 Schneid
185. iguration       Speaker Distance       Level Calibration             Equalizer Settings       THX Audio Setup    Miscellaneous Volume Setup    gt  page 65  OSD Setup  Hardware Setup Tuner    gt  page 66  HDMI  Auto Standby  Network  Initial Setup  Remote Controller Remote ID  Setup Remote Mode Setup    gt  page 69   Lock Setup Setup    gt  page 69              Audio Adjust    gt  page 58     Multiplex Mono       Dolby       DTS       Audyssey DSX       Theater Dimensional       LFE Level       Source Setup    gt  page 60     Audyssey       IntelliVolume       A V Sync       Name Edit       Picture Adjust       Audio Selector       Listening Mode Preset    gt  page 64     BD DVD       CBL SAT       STB DVR       GAME       PC       AUX       TUNER       TV CD       PHONO       NET          USB       A En52 Y    Input Output Assign    5        St        gt   gt  setup  gt             Input Output Assign    Monitor Out    On the    Monitor Out    settings  you can select whether or  not to have the video sources    images output through the  HDMI output    If you connect your TV to the HDMI output  the    Monitor  Out    setting is automatically set and composite video and  component video sources are upconverted  and output     Composite video   component video HDMI    C IN 2          Y un  C OUT       Composite video  HDMI  component video           lt q              Note     See    Video Connection Formats      gt  page 90  for charts  showing how the    Monitor Out    and   
186. in your speaker      unit  Check if the unit produces normal sounds     E The following settings can be made for the    composite video inputs   You must use the buttons on the unit to make these  settings    On the AV receiver  press the input selector for the input  source that you want to set and the SETUP button  simultaneously  While holding down the input selector  button  press SETUP until    Video ATT  On  appears  on the AV receiver s display  Then  release both buttons   To turn the setting off  repeat the above process so that   Video ATT  Off  appears on the AV receiver s  display  and release the buttons       Video Attenuation    This setting can be made for the BD DVD  CBL SAT   STB DVR  GAME or USB input    If you have a game console connected to the composite  video input  and the picture isn t very clear  you can  attenuate the gain    Video ATT  Off  The gain is not changed  default    Video ATT  On  The gain is reduced by the values  specified below        2 dB for the HDMI output       6 dB for the MONITOR OUT V output     Ae     Appendix    E If the picture on your TV monitor connected to  the HDMI output is unstable  try switching the  DeepColor function off    Important Note Regarding Video Playback    The AV receiver can upconvert component video and    To turn off the DeepColor function  simultaneously composite video sources for display on a TV connected to  press the STB DVR and OON STANDBY buttons on the HDMI output  However  if the picture qualit
187. ina Limited    Unit 1033  10 F  Star House  No 3  Salisbury Road  Tsim Sha Tsui Kowloon  Hong Kong     Tel  852 2429 3118 Fax  852 2428 9039  http   www onkyochina com     Onkyo China PRC  1301  555 Tower  No 555 West NanJin Road  Jin an  Shanghai     China 200041  Tel  86 21 52131366 Fax  86 21 52130396  http   www cn onkyo com     SN 29401127EN   C  Copyright 2012 Onkyo Sound  amp  Vision Corporation Japan  All rights reserved          2940 1    Y1203 1    127EN               ONKYO    Using Internet Radio    Common Procedures in Internet Radio  Menu    Note      Available services may vary depending on the region     1    Press NET     A list of the network services appears  and the NET  indicator lights  If it flashes  verify that the Ethernet  cable is firmly connected to the AV receiver     Select the desired service and press ENTER   The top page of the selected service appears     Using Multiple Accounts   The AV receiver supports multiple user accounts  which  means you can freely switch between several logins   After registering user accounts  login is performed from  the    Users    screen     1 Press MENU while the Users screen is displayed   The following menu items appear     Add new user    Remove this user    You can either store a new user account  or delete  an existing one     Tip     Some of the services don   t allow the use of multiple user  accounts      You can store up to 10 user accounts      To switch between accounts you must first log out from the 
188. ing mode will  automatically switch to Direct    Based on the audio channel signal contained in the source  the corresponding speakers will output  the sound    The AV receiver can input the DSD signal from HDMI IN  Depending on the player  setting the  output on the player side to PCM might bring better sound    For the Blu ray Discs  Dolby Digital is used in a 3 1 5 1 channel speaker system    DTS is used depending on the configuration of the AV receiver    If there are no surround back speakers  DTS is used    Tf there are no surround back speakers  Dolby Pro Logic IT is used    This listening mode can be selected only when all the following conditions are satisfied         Center speaker is connected       Either the front high or front wide speakers are connected     The listening modes cannot be selected with some source formats        THX Surround EX   This mode expands 5 1 channel sources for  6 1 7 1  channel playback  It s especially  suited to Dolby Digital EX sources  THX  Surround EX  also known as Dolby Digital  Surround EX  is a joint development    between Dolby Laboratories and THX Ltd             Dolby Pro Logic II Game   THX Select2  Games  The combination of Dolby Pro Logic II  Game and THX Select2 Games modes can  be used  The PLII and THX indicators  light on the AV receiver s display                      44    Y Ae     Using the Home Menu    The Home menu provides quick access to frequently used    menus     The Home menu appears only on a TV that is  c
189. ing this button twice selects the previous song        4    This button fast reverses the current song        H  This button pauses playback        SEARCH    You can toggle between the playback screen and the list  screen during playback        DISPLAY    This button switches between song information during  playback    Press this button while the list screen is displayed to return to  the playback screen        ALBUM      In Standard Mode  iPod iPhone   this button selects albums                 MENU    This button displays the menu of Internet radio services        RETURN    This button returns to the previous menu         gt  gt   This button fast forwards the current song           o    9        gt  gt      This button selects the next song           En24 Y    m  This button stops playback        MODE    You can switch between Standard Mode and Extended  Mode        RANDOM  This button performs random playback           REPEAT    Press this button repeatedly to cycle through the repeat  modes        Tip      See  Controlling Other Components  about the operation of  other components   page 75      Note      The buttons you can use will differ depending on the devices and  media used for playback     Understanding Icons on the Display    This section describes icons that appear on the AV  receiver   s display during media playback        Icon    Description       Folder       Track       Playback       Pause       Fast Forward       Fast Reverse          Artist       Album
190. ion    Bookmark this artist    Pandora will bookmark your favorite artist for your  profile on www pandora com    Bookmark this song    Pandora will bookmark the current song and allow  you to buy them all from Amazon or   Tunes in one  step    Add to My Favorites    Adds a station to My Favorites list     PANDORA    internet radio    PANDORA  the PANDORA logo  and the Pandora trade  dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora  Media  Inc  Used with permission     Using Rhapsody  U S  only     1 Use A F to select    Sign in to your account    and then    press ENTER    To use Rhapsody  you need an account  If you don   t  have one yet  you can create a new account at  www rhapsody com onkyo   If you have an existing Rhapsody account  select     Sign in to your account    and press ENTER   Enter your user name  usually your email  and  password in the next keyboard screen  or in Web  Setup     B Using the keyboard screen   1  Use A V  4    and ENTER to enter your user  name and password    2  Select    OK       3  Press ENTER  The    Confirm your entries     screen appears    4  Press ENTER    Tip    If you want to use multiple user accounts  see    Using    Multiple Accounts      gt  page 1   Login can be made from  the    Users    screen     2 Use A V to select the menu  then press ENTER     Search     You can search for music by Artist  Album  or Track     Music Guide    You can play tracks from Genres  Top Artists  Top  Albums  Top Tracks  New Releases  and St
191. ion are available at www last fm subscribe    1 Use A Y to select  Sign in to your account   and  then press ENTER   If you have the existing Last fm account  you can sign  in to your account to select  Sign in to your  account   Enter your user name and password in the  next keyboard screen     E Using the keyboard screen   1  Use A Y 4    and the ENTER to enter your user  name and password    2  Select    OK       3  Press ENTER  The    Confirm your entries     screen appears    4  Press ENTER       Please wait       appears and then    Last fm Internet   Radio    screen appears    Tip    If you want to use multiple user accounts  see    Using    Multiple Accounts      gt  page 1   Login can be made from  the    Users    screen     2 Use A V to select menu and then press ENTER     Search Station    You can search station by Artist  Tag  or User Name   Top Artists Station    You can play tracks of top rated artists    Top Tags Station    You can play tracks of top rated tags    Personal Station    You can play tracks from personalized station     Your  Library        Your Neighbourhood    and    Your  Recommendations            En2 V    Using Internet Radio    Profile    You can play tracks from    Recently Listened  Tracks        Library    and    Neighbours      Account Info    Confirm your account information    Sign Out    It signs out from your account        Use A V to selecta station  and press ENTER or  gt   to start playback   Playback starts and the playback screen
192. is 13  correct  and that the bare wires are in contact with the  metal part of each speaker terminal    Make sure that the input source is properly selected  23  Make sure that the speaker cables are not shorting  13  Check the volume  The AV receiver is designed for      home theater enjoyment  It has a wide volume range   allowing precise adjustment    Tf the MUTING indicator is flashing on the AV 47  receiver   s display  press the remote controller   s  MUTING button to unmute the AV receiver    While a pair of headphones is connected to the 47  PHONES jack  no sound is output from the speakers    If there s no sound from a DVD player connected to      an HDMI IN  check the DVD player   s output   settings  and be sure to select a supported audio   format    Check the digital audio output setting on the      connected device  On some game consoles  such as   those that support DVD  the default setting is off    With some DVD Video discs  you need to selectan       audio output format from a menu    If your turntable uses an MC cartridge  you must      connect an MC head amp  or an MC transformer    Make sure that none of the connecting cables are      bent  twisted  or damaged     Not all listening modes use all speakers  38    Specify the speaker distances and adjust the 56  individual speaker levels     Make sure that the speaker setup microphone is not      still connected                Tf the input signal format is set to    PCM    or    DTS     64  Set it to    Off 
193. ispone de una cuenta de Pandora  puede  a  adirla al receptor Onkyo seleccionando    I have a  Pandora Account    e iniciando la sesi  n con su  direcci  n de correo electr  nico y contrase  a     Consejo      Si desea utilizar m  ltiples cuentas de usuario  consulte    Uso  de m  ltiples cuentas      gt  p  gina 1   Se puede iniciar  sesi  n desde la pantalla    Users        2 Utilice A Y para seleccionar la emisora en la lista de    emisoras y luego pulse ENTER    Se inicia la reproducci  n y aparece la pantalla de  reproducci  n    Create a New Station    Introduzca el nombre de una canci  n  artista o g  nero   Pandora crear   una emisora de radio exclusiva para  usted basada en las cualidades musicales de esa  canci  n  de ese artista o de ese g  nero     E Elementos del men     I like this song    Si aprueba  pulgar arriba  una canci  n  Pandora  reproducir   m  s m  sica parecida    I don   t like this song    Si no aprueba  pulgar abajo  la canci  n  Pandora  eliminar   dicha canci  n de la emisora actual   Why is this song playing     Descubra algunos de los atributos musicales que  Pandora utiliza para crear sus emisoras de radio  personalizadas    Don   t play the song for a month    Si se cansa de una canci  n  puede    silenciarla    de  modo que Pandora no la reproduzca durante un mes   Create station from this artist    Crea una emisora de radio a partir de este artista        Es2 V    Uso de Internet Radio    Delete this station    Esto eliminar   de forma per
194. iver  We recommend that you back up your  important music files beforehand      MP3 players containing music files that are managed with special  music software are not supported      Operation is not guaranteed for all USB devices  which includes  the ability to power them        Do not connect your USB device via a USB hub  The USB device  must be connected directly to the AV receiver s USB port       f the USB device contains a lot of data  the AV receiver make  take a while to read it      USB devices with security functions cannot be played     5       Supported Audio File Formats    For server playback and playback from a USB device  the  AV receiver supports the following music file formats   Variable bit rate  VBR  files are supported  However   playback times may not display correctly     Note      With remote playback  the AV receiver does not support the  following music file formats  FLAC and Ogg Vorbis       n the case of server playback  the above mentioned file formats  may not be played depending on the server type     E          mp3 or  MP3      MP3 files must be MPEG 1 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3  format with sampling rates of 8 kHz  11 025 kHz   12 KHz  16 kHz  22 05 kHz  24 kHz  32 kHz  44 1 kHz   48 kHz and bitrates of between 8 kbps and 320 kbps   Incompatible files cannot be played     B WMA   wma       WMA    WMA stands for Windows Media Audio and is an audio   compression technology developed by Microsoft   Corporation  Audio can be encoded in WMA format by 
195. jusqu    ce  que cela corresponde    votre appareil      Selon le mod  le et l ann  e de votre appareil  la compatibilit   n est pas garantie      Avec certains mod  les  la t  l  commande peut ne pas fonctionner ou sa compatibilit   peut   tre  limit  e    une partie de la fonctionnalit   de l appareil      En outre  il n est pas possible d ajouter de nouveaux codes aux pr  r  glages de t  l  commande  existants      Bien que les codes de t  l  commande fournis soient corrects au moment de l impression de la  liste  ils sont susceptibles d   tre modifi  s par le fabricant     Remote Control Codes    C  digos de control remoto    1    Manteniendo pulsado el bot  n REMOTE MODE para el cual desea introducir un   c  digo  pulse y mantenga presionado el bot  n  DISPLAY   aproximadamente 3   segundos     Se iluminar   el bot  n REMOTE MODE indicador Remote    En los productos Integra  los nombres de los botones aparecen con may  sculas  Por   ejemplo  el bot  n    Remote Mode  y el bot  n    Display       Notas      No podr  n introducirse c  digos de mando a distancia para  RECEIVER  y el bot  n multizona        nicamente podr  n introducirse c  digos de mando a distancia de televisor para el bot  n  TV       Con la excepci  n de  RECEIVER    TV  y el bot  n multizona  se pueden asignar c  digos de  mando a distancia de cualquier categor  a a los botones de REMOTE MODE  No obstante  estos  botones tambi  n pueden funcionar como botones de selector de entrada  por tanto  seleccion
196. k Start    and    Audyssey 2EQ Full   Calibration            Audyssey Quick Start    uses the measurement from one  position to perform the speaker setting only         Audyssey 2EQ Full Calibration  uses the  measurement from three positions to correct room  response in addition to the speaker setting    The more positions are used in measuring  the better the   listening environment will become  We recommend using   a measurement from three positions to create the best   listening environment    The Quick Start takes 2 minutes and Full Calibration takes   about 10 minutes    Total measurement time varies depending on the number   of speakers     Measurement procedure    To create a listening environment in your home theater that  all listeners will enjoy  Audyssey 2EQ takes measurements  at up to three positions within the listening area  Position  the microphone at ear height of a seated listener with the  microphone tip pointed directly at the ceiling using a  tripod  Do not hold the microphone in your hand during  measurements as this will produce inaccurate results    D First measurement position  Also referred to as the Main Listening Position  this  refers to the most central position where one would  normally sit within the listening environment   Audyssey 2EQ uses the measurements from this  position to calculate speaker distance  level  polarity   and the optimum crossover value for the subwoofer      2  Second measurement position  The right side of the listening 
197. ker Setup   gt  page 35         Here you can adjust the level of each speaker with the  built in test tone so that the volume of each speaker is the  same at the listening position     Note      These settings cannot be calibrated in either of the following  cases       The    Audio TV Out    setting is set to    On      page 67           HDMI Control RIHD     is set to    On      gt  page 67  and  you re listening through your TV speakers       The AV receiver is muted     E Left  Front Wide Left  Front High Left  Center    Front High Right  Front Wide Right  Right   Surround Right  Surround Back Right  Surround  Back Left  Surround Left      12 0dB to 0 0dB to  12 0dB in 0 5 dB steps           Subwoofer     gt   15 0dB to 0 0dB to  12 0dB in 0 5 dB steps   Note      Speakers that you set to  No  or  None  in   Speaker Configuration  cannot be selected   page 55         Ly To be continued    5         When the    Powered Zone 2    setting is set to    Yes    and Zone 2  is turned on  the surround back and front high speakers cannot be  used      When the    Powered Zone 3    setting is set to    Yes    and Zone 3  is turned on  the surround and surround back speakers cannot be  used      The test tone is output at the standard level for THX  which is  0 dB  absolute volume setting 82   If you normally listen at  volume settings below this  be careful because the test tone will  be much louder     1 For the center speaker and subwoofer  the level settings made    by using the
198. l be output to  the TV or other components via HDMI connection  The  HDMI indicator will be dimly lit in standby mode  Note  that the indicator may not light under certain conditions    gt  page 52    This setting is fixed to    Auto    automatically when the  above    HDMI Control RIHD     setting is set to    On      resulting in automatic input source selection     Note     Only an input source assigned to an HDMI IN via    HDMI Input   setting is enabled   gt  page 53       The power consumption in standby mode will increase during the  HDMI Through function  however in the following cases  the  power consumption can be saved        The TV is in standby mode       You are watching a TV program      Refer to the connected component   s instruction manual for  details      Depending on the connected component  the correct input source  may not be selected with the setting fixed to    Auto         This setting is set to    Off    automatically when the    HDMI  Control RIHD     setting is set to    Off           Audio TV Out    gt  Off      On  This preference determines whether the incoming audio  signal is output from the HDMI output  You may want to  turn this preference on if your TV is connected to the       En 67       Advanced Operations    HDMI output and you want to listen to the audio from a  connected component through your TV   s speakers   Normally  this should be set to    Off        Note      If    On    is selected and the audio can be output from the TV  the
199. l codes from any category can be assigned for  the REMOTE MODE buttons  However  these buttons also  work as input selector buttons   gt  page 23   so choose a  REMOTE MODE button that corresponds with the input to  which you connect your component  For example  if you  connect your CD player to the CD input  choose TV CD  when entering its remote control code     3 Within 30 seconds  use the number buttons to enter  the 5 digit remote control code   The remote indicator flashes twice   If the remote control code is not entered successfully   the remote indicator will flash once slowly     Note      Though the provided remote control codes are correct at the time  of release  they are subject to change     Remapping Colored Buttons    You can change the configuration of colored buttons  with  which REMOTE MODE buttons are preset     1 While holding down the REMOTE MODE button  that you want to program  press and hold down A   Red  until the remote indicator lights  about 3  seconds     You can only change colored buttons for components  whose codes belong to categories of the Remote  Control Codes list  BD DVD player  TV  cable set top  box  etc      2 Within 30 seconds  press the colored buttons in the  order that you want to reassign them   The button presses are assigned to each button from  left to right  The remote indicator flashes twice   indicating that the sequence has been successfully  assigned  If the sequence is not successfully assigned   the remote indicator wi
200. le  Use a shielded CATS Ethernet cable  straight type  to  connect the AV receiver to your home network     B Internet Access  for Internet radio    To receive Internet radio  your Ethernet network must have  Internet access  A narrowband Internet connection  e g    56K modem  ISDN  will not provide satisfactory results   so a broadband connection is strongly recommended  e g    cable modem  xDSL modem  etc    Please consult your ISP  or computer dealer if you re unsure     Note      To receive Internet radio with the AV receiver  your broadband  Internet connection must be working and able to access the Web        En96 Y    Appendix    Consult your ISP if you have any problems with your Internet  connection      The AV receiver uses DHCP to configure its network settings  automatically  If you want to configure these settings manually   see    Network      gt  page 68       The AV receiver does not support PPPoE settings  so if you have  a PPPoE type Internet connection  you must use a PPPoE   compatible router      Depending on your ISP  you may need to specify a proxy server  to use Internet radio  If your computer is configured to use a  proxy server  use the same settings for the AV receiver      gt  page 69      Server Requirements    Bi Server playback   The AV receiver can play digital music files stored on a   computer or media server and supports the following   technologies      Windows Media Player 11     Windows Media Player 12     Windows Media Connect 2 0     D
201. le is not responsible for  the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and  regulatory standards    Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone  may affect wireless performance     MAL    Mobile High Definition Link       MHL  the MHL Logo  and Mobile High Definition Link are  trademark or registered trademarks of MHL LLC in the United  States and other counties              Apple TV is a trademark of Apple Inc   registered in the U S  and  other countries        A En99 Y       Specifications  Amplifier Section    Rated Output Power    All channels   North American     110 watts minimum continuous power per  channel  8 ohm loads  2 channels driven  from 20 Hz to 20 kHz  with a maximum  total harmonic distortion of 0 08   FTC   125 watts minimum continuous power per  channel  6 ohm loads  2 channels driven at  1 kHz  with a maximum total harmonic  distortion of 0 7   FTC      Others   7 ch x 170 W at 6 ohms  1 kHz  1 ch driven  of 1   IEC    Maximum Effective Output Power   Asian   7 ch x 185 W at 6 ohms  1 kHz  1 ch driven   JEITA     Dynamic Power     TEC60268 Short term maximum output power    250 W  3 Q  Front   220 W  4 Q  Front   130 W  8 Q  Front     THD N  Total Harmonic Distortion Noise    0 08   20 Hz   20 kHz  half power   Damping Factor 60  Front  1 kHz  8 Q   Input Sensitivity and Impedance  Unbalance    200 mV 47 kQ  LINE    2 5 mV 47 kQ  PHONO MM   Rated RCA Output Level and Impedance   200 mV 470 Q  PRE OUT   Maximum RCA Output
202. lect a listening mode and enjoy   See also        Using the Listening Modes    gt  page 38     E Operating      the AV receiver    Input selector buttons  LISTENING MODE MASTER VOLUME                               1 Use the input selector buttons to select the input  source     Start playback on the source component     To adjust the volume  use the MASTER VOLUME  control     8         Select a listening mode and enjoy        Bi Screen Saver    If there is no video signal on the current input source and  no operation for a specific time  three minutes by  default   a screen saver automatically comes on     Tip    The time until the screen saver activates itself can be changed  in the  Screen Saver  setting   page 66        The screen will return to its previous state if the AV receiver is  operated     Controlling Contents of USB or       Network Devices    Press USB or NET first     RECEIVER    REMOTE MODE INPUT SELE           c   MODE       177        Puanusr                    RANDOM MODE    D TUN  DIMMER SLEEP    ONKYO    RC 836M    Turning On  amp  Basic Operations                   MENU    This button displays the top menu for each media or service        A V and ENTER    These buttons navigate through the menus         lt   gt   This button cycles through pages        PLAYLIST  lt   gt     In Standard Mode  iPod iPhone   this button selects  playlists        Ba  This button starts playback         lt  lt     This button selects the beginning of the current song   Press
203. lfunction  Before you record important data  make  sure that the material will be recorded correctly        If the video source is connected to a composite video    Before disconnecting the power cord from the wall input  select the relevant input selector  and assign it to    outlet  set the AV receiver to standby    77777         Tip    To by pass the upconversion  set the  Picture Mode  setting to     Direct      gt  page 63         Ens V ley       Firmware Update    To update the firmware of the AV receiver  you can choose  from the following two methods  update via network  or  update via USB storage  Choose the one that best suits  your environment  Before proceeding with the update   please read the corresponding explanations carefully     E Update via network  You need a wired Internet connection to update the  firmware     E Update via USB storage   gt  page 88   Please prepare a USB storage device such as a USB flash  memory stick  You need at least 32 MB of available  space to update the firmware     Note      Check the network connection before updating      Do not touch any cable or device connected to the AV receiver  during the update process      Do not attempt to access the AV receiver from your PC while it   is being updated    Do not shutdown the power of the AV receiver while it is being   updated    The storage media in the USB card reader may not work    If the USB device is partitioned  each section will be treated as an   independent device    If the U
204. ll flash once slowly     Tip     To reset the REMOTE MODE buttons to their default settings   see    Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons      gt  page 77    Note      If any other button than the colored buttons is pressed  the  operation will be cancelled      This operation cannot be done while the AV receiver is in  Receiver mode or when ZONE 2 3 is active        En 76       Controlling Other Components    Remote Control Codes for Onkyo  Components Connected via RI    Onkyo components that are connected via RI are  controlled by pointing the remote controller at the AV  receiver  not the component  This allows you to control  components that are out of view  in a rack  for example     1 Make sure the Onkyo component is connected with  an RI cable and an analog audio cable  RCA    See    Connecting Onkyo RI Components    for details    gt  page 18     2 Enter the appropriate remote control code for a  REMOTE MODE button  by referring to the  previous section     gt  42157    Onkyo cassette tape deck with RI     81993    Onkyo Dock with RI    3 Press the REMOTE MODE button  point the  remote controller at the AV receiver  and operate  the component     Controlling Onkyo components without RI  If you want to control an Onkyo component by pointing the  remote controller directly at it  or you want to control an  Onkyo component that s not connected via RI  use the  following remote control codes      30627   Onkyo DVD player without RI   gt  71817   Onkyo CD player without RI   
205. manente una emisora de  su cuenta de Pandora  Toda la informaci  n sobre sus  aprobaciones   desaprobaciones se perder   si quiere  volver a crear la emisora con la misma canci  n o  artista     Create station from this song    Crea una emisora de radio a partir de esta canci  n   Rename this station    Le permite renombrar la emisora de radio actual   Bookmark this artist    Pandora marcar   su artista favorito para su perfil en  www pandora com    Bookmark this song    Pandora marcar   la canci  n actual y le permitir    comprarlas todas en Amazon o iTunes con un solo  paso    Add to My Favorites    A  ade una emisora a la lista Mis favoritos     PANDORA    internet radio  PANDORA  el logotipo de PANDORA logo  y la imagen  corporativa de Pandora son marcas comerciales o marcas  comerciales registradas de Pandora Media  Inc  Uso con  permiso     Uso de Rhapsody  s  lo EE UU      1 Utilice A Y para seleccionar    Sign in to your    account    y luego pulse ENTER    Para utilizar Rhapsody  necesitar   una cuenta  Si  todav  a no tiene una  puede crear una nueva en  www rhapsody com onkyo   Si ya tiene una cuenta Rhapsody  seleccione    Sign in  to your account    y pulse ENTER    Escriba su nombre de usuario  normalmente el correo  electr  nico  y contrase  a en la pantalla de teclado que  aparece a continuaci  n o en la configuraci  n web     E Utilizaci  n de la pantalla de teclado    1  Utilice A W        y ENTER para introducir su  nombre de usuario y su contrase  a    2  
206. ments printed on the unit   s rear panel  e g   AC  230 V  50 Hz or AC 120 V  60 Hz      The power cord plug is used to disconnect this unit  from the AC power source  Make sure that the plug is  readily operable  easily accessible  at all times     For models with  POWER  button  or with both   POWER  and  ON STANDB Y  buttons    Pressing the  POWER  button to select OFF mode  does not fully disconnect from the mains  If you do not  intend to use the unit for an extended period  remove  the power cord from the AC outlet     For models with  ON STANDBY  button only   Pressing the  ON STANDBY  button to select  Standby mode does not fully disconnect from the  mains  If you do not intend to use the unit for an  extended period  remove the power cord from the AC  outlet     Preventing Hearing Loss   Caution   Excessive sound pressure from earphones and   headphones can cause hearing loss    Batteries and Heat Exposure   Warning   Batteries  battery pack or batteries installed  shall not   be exposed to excessive heat as sunshine  fire or the   like    Never Touch this Unit with Wet Hands   Never   handle this unit or its power cord while your hands are   wet or damp  If water or any other liquid gets inside  this unit  have it checked by your Onkyo dealer    Handling Notes     If you need to transport this unit  use the original  packaging to pack it how it was when you originally  bought it      Do not leave rubber or plastic items on this unit for a  long time  because they ma
207. met de jouer vos listes de lecture personnelles   My Library     Marquez vos albums et vos pistes personnelles dans le  catalogue de Rhapsody    l aide de My Library   Account Info     V  rifiez les informations de votre compte    Sign Out     D  connectez vous de votre compte Rhapsody        Fre V    Utilisation d une webradio    3 Utilisez A Y pour s  lectionner un canal  puis    appuyez sur ENTER ou    pour d  marrer la  lecture    La lecture d  bute et l   cran de lecture s affiche    Vous pouvez contr  lez les pistes avec les touches sur  la t  l  commande    Boutons activ  s   B    II  Bl   lt  lt    gt  gt    lt 4   gt  gt      RANDOM  REPEAT    Remarque      Surles canaux Rhapsody  certaines touches ne fonctionnent  pas     E El  ments du menu   Add track to My Library     Marquez les pistes en cours de lecture    Add album to My Library     Marquez les albums en cours de lecture    Add playlist to My Library     Marquez les listes de lecture en cours de lecture   Add channel to My Channels     Marquez les canaux de radio Rhapsody en cours de  lecture     Add to My Favorites    Permet d ajouter une piste  un canal ou une liste de  lecture    la liste My Favorites    Conseil      Vous pouvez supprimer des pistes  des albums et des canaux  Rhapsody marqu  s de My Library     Utilisation de Sirius XM Internet Radio     Am  rique du Nord uniquement        Votre ampli tuner AV Onkyo comprend un essai gratuit de  SiriusXM Internet Radio  L   cran    Account Info    affiche 
208. mic Volume makes the  necessary rapid or gradual adjustments to maintain the  desired playback volume level while optimizing the  dynamic range  Audyssey Dynamic EQ is integrated into  Dynamic Volume so that as the playback volume is  adjusted automatically  the perceived bass response   tonal balance  surround impression and dialog clarity  remain the same whether watching movies  flipping  between television channels or changing from stereo to  surround sound content        A En61 V    Advanced Operations    IntelliVolume       IntelliVolume    gt   12dB to 04   to  12dB in 1 dB steps   With Intelli Volume  you can set the input level for each  input selector individually  This is useful if one of your  source components is louder or quieter than the others   Use   4    to set the level   If a component is noticeably louder than the others  use  lt 4  to reduce its input level  If it   s noticeably quieter  use  gt  to  increase its input level     Note      IntelliVolume does not work for Zone 2 3   A N Sync    E A V Sync      Omsec to 800msec in 5 msec steps  When using progressive scanning on your Blu ray  Disc DVD player  you may find that the picture and sound  are out of sync  With this setting  you can correct this by  delaying the audio signals   To view the TV picture while setting the delay  press  ENTER   To return to the previous screen  press RETURN     The range of values you can adjust will depend on whether   your TV or display supports HDMI Lip Sync and if 
209. n     SETUP       HOME        RC 836M    E DVD player DVD recorder operation    Controlling Other Components    Bi Satellite receiver Cable receiver operation       Available buttons    Available buttons                                                                                                                                                        TOP MENU OSOURCE  2   GUIDE    Number  1 to 9  0       a V  lt   gt      DISPLAY     A V  lt   gt  Number   10  ENTER MUTING ENTER SOURCE      SETUP      CH          SETUP  9    DISPLAY        I  BI   lt  lt   gt  gt   DISC           II       lt  lt  pe  MUTING  Fa   gt  gt    42  MENU laa   gt         CH      O  A  Red      RETURN     A  Red     PREV CH  B  Green  AUDIO   B  Green  43   RETURN  C  Yellow  1          C  Yellow  AUDIO  D  Blue  i D  Blue      CLR    Number  1 to 9  0 1  Number  41071 B CD player CD recorder MD recorder operation  Available buttons  E VCR PVR operation             0   Number  1 to 9  0  Available buttons ENTER Number   10     GUIDE OSOURCE    SETUP OSOURCE       a V  lt   gt  O  DISPLAY       II  E   lt  lt    gt  gt      DISPLAY  ENTER MUTING 4 4   gt   MUTING      SETUP     CH         SEARCH     DISC             ILE  lt  gt      0  PREVCH REPEAT     CLR   lt  lt    gt  gt     RETURN RANDOM      Number  1 to 9  0  9  CLR MODE  Number   10  Note       Cassette tape deck operation       Available buttons                     a  Reverse  Playback   Bl   lt  lt    gt  gt     lt  lt    gt  gt      OSO
210. n Sie bitte unter    Verwendung mehrerer Konten     nach   gt  Seite 1   Das Login kann vom    Users      Bildschirm aus erfolgen     2 Verwenden Sie A V  um das Men   auszuw  hlen    und dann dr  cken Sie ENTER    Search Station    Sie k  nnen einen Sender anhand Interpreten  Tags  oder Benutzernamen suchen    Top Artists Station    Sie k  nnen Titel der am besten bewerteten Interpreten  wiedergeben    Top Tags Station    Sie k  nnen Titel der am besten bewerteten Tags  wiedergeben    Personal Station    Sie k  nnen Titel aus einem pers  nlich angepassten  Sender wiedergeben     Your Library        Your  Neighbourhood    und    Your Recommendations          C  Copyright 2012 Onkyo Sound  amp  Vision Corporation Japan  All rights reserved     Internetradio verwenden    Profile    Sie k  nnen Titel aus    Recently Listened Tracks         Library    und    Neighbours    wiedergeben   Account Info    Best  tigen Sie Ihre Kontoinformation    Sign Out    Zur Abmeldung aus Ihrem Konto     3 Verwenden Sie A V  um einen Sender auszuw  hlen  und dann dr  cken Sie ENTER oder  gt    um die  Wiedergabe zu starten    Die Wiedergabe wird gestartet und die  Wiedergabeanzeige erscheint     Aktivierte Tasten  B    Ml   gt  gt        B Men  symbole   I Love this track    Titel Informationen werden auf dem Last fm Server  gespeichert und die H  ufigkeit der Wiedergabe wird  erh  ht    Ban this track    Titel Informationen werden auf dem Last fm Server  gespeichert und die H  ufigkeit der Wieder
211. nalog PCM source in the Mono listening mode     Output Speaker   gt  Center   Mono audio is output by the center speaker    gt  Left   Right   Mono audio is output by the front left and right  speakers   This setting determines which speakers output mono audio  when the Mono listening mode is selected     A En 58 Y    Advanced Operations    Note      Ifthe    Center    setting is set to    None      gt  page 55   this setting  cannot be selected     Dolby    E PL lix Music  2ch Input   These settings apply to only 2 channel stereo sources   If you re not using any surround back speakers  these    settings apply to Dolby Pro Logic II  not Dolby Pro Logic  IIx     Panorama    gt On    gt  Off  With this setting  you can broaden the width of the front  stereo image when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music  listening mode     Dimension    gt  3 to 0 to  3  With this setting  you can move the sound field forward or  backward when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music  listening mode  Higher settings move the sound field  backward  Lower settings move it forward   If the stereo image feels too wide  or there   s too much  surround sound  move the sound field forward to improve  the balance  Conversely  if the stereo image feels like it   s  in mono  or there   s not enough surround sound  move it  backward     Center Width     0 0307  With this setting  you can adjust the width of the sound  from the center speaker when using the Dolby Pro Logic  IIx Music listening mode  Normally  i
212. nalog RGB  This is a conventional analog interface to connect a PC and  a display device  also called D Sub or D subminiature                    Composite video  Composite video is commonly used on TVs  DVDs  and  other video equipment     KA C  O  Yellow       En 15 V    Connections    E Optical digital audio    Optical digital connections allow you to enjoy digital  sound such as PCM   2  Dolby Digital or DTS  The audio  quality is the same as coaxial     OPTICAL     ED  E Coaxial digital audio    Coaxial digital connections allow you to enjoy digital  sound such as          Dolby Digital or DTS  The audio  quality is the same as optical     a a Orange    COAXIAL    E Analog audio  RCA   Analog audio connections  RCA  carry analog audio     m      White      Red     2 For PCM signals  the supported sampling rates are  32 44  1 48 88 2 96 kHz  With HDMI connections  176 4 and  192 kHz are also supported     Note      The AV receiver does not support SCART plugs      The AV receiver s optical digital jacks have shutter type covers  that open when an optical plug is inserted and close when it s  removed  Push plugs in all the way       To prevent shutter damage  hold the optical plug straight  when inserting and removing     5       Connecting Components with HDMI    Satellite cable set top box  etc                                                                           Ema     2 E sm 1 ovo  E   G3 22 Ez    TV  projector  etc                   par                         Blu
213. nd Speaker  Setup is in progress  one of the error messages below may  appear        2EQ  Auto Setup       1  AUDYSSEY             Retry  Cancel             Error message    The options are    gt  Retry   Try again    gt  Cancel   Cancel Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker  Setup     Ambient noise is too high   The background noise is too loud  Remove the source of  the noise and try again     Speaker Matching Error   The number of speakers detected was different from that  of the first measurement  Check the speaker connection     Writing Error   This message appears if saving fails  Try saving again  If  this message appears after 2 or 3 attempts  contact your  Onkyo dealer     Speaker Detect Error  This message appears if a speaker is not detected     No     means that no speaker was detected   Tip    See  Speaker Configuration  for appropriate settings     2 page 12      Changing the Speaker Setup Manually    You can manually make changes to the settings found  during Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker  Setup    See also    e    Speaker Configuration      gt  page 55       Speaker Distance    page 56       Level Calibration    page 56       Equalizer Settings    page 57     Note     Please note that THX recommends any THX main speakers be set  to    80Hz THX      If you set up your speakers using  Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup  please  make sure manually that any THX speakers are set to     80Hz THX     crossover   gt  page 55       Sometimes d
214. nd a specific Album  Artist  or Song    Account Info    Your MP3tunes account information    Sign Out     Log out of your MP3tunes account     The track at the top of the music list is automatically  played back     A En7       Using Internet Radio    5 Use A F to select a track and press ENTER or  gt     to start playback    A playback screen appears    You can control the tracks with the buttons on the  remote control     Enabled buttons  B    II  W   lt  lt    gt  gt     E Menu Items    Go to Menu   Displays additional menu options     You can view or change your MP3tunes account  settings by going to www mp3tunes com account     Utilisation d   une  webradio    Proc  dures courantes dans le menu de       webradio    Remarque      Les services disponibles peuvent varier en fonction de la r  gion     1    Appuyez sur NET   Une liste des services r  seau s affiche  et le t  moin  NET s   allume  S   il clignote  v  rifiez que le c  ble    Ethernet est fermement branch   sur l   ampli tuner AV     S  lectionnez le service d  sir   et appuyez sur  ENTER     La page principale du service s  lectionn   s   affiche     Utilisation de plusieurs comptes   L   ampli tuner AV prend en charge plusieurs comptes  utilisateur  ce qui signifie que vous pouvez librement  commuter entre plusieurs connexions  Apr  s avoir  enregistr   des comptes utilisateur  l   identification est  r  alis  e    partir de l     cran    Users        1 Appuyez sur MENU lorsque l   cran Users est  affich     L
215. ne 2 3 is  active  the Z2 or Z3 indicator is dimly lit      Activating Zones in the main room when the listening mode is set  to Pure Audio will automatically switch it to Direct       AUX  cannot be selected as input sources for Zone 2 3      When  AUX  is the input source of Main room and Zone 2 3 is  set to share the same source  no sound will be output from  Zone 2 3     Using the Remote Controller in       Zone and Multiroom Control Kits    To control the AV receiver with the remote controller  while you re in Zone  you ll need a commercially available  multiroom remote control kit for each zone      Multiroom kits are made by Niles and Xantech    These kits can also be used when there isn t a clear line of  sight to the AV receiver  s remote sensor  such as when it s  installed inside a cabinet     Using a Multiroom Kit with Zone    In this setup  the IR receiver in Zone picks up the infrared  signals from the remote controller and feeds them through  to the AV receiver in the main room via the connecting  block                                IR n A 2  H 1  Connect         Pe   receiver  block    Remote controller  Main room Zone                    lt   Signal flow    The miniplug cable from the connecting block should be  connected to the AV receiver   s IR IN jack  as shown  below        En 72 V    Advanced Operations    From the connecting block    1    Miniplug cable    Gi    AV receiver    Using a Multiroom Kit with a Cabinet       In this setup  the IR receiver pi
216. nected to the HDMI output  select 53               in the    HDMI Input    setting to watch  composite video  and component video sources     If the video source is connected to a component video 17 54  input  you must assign that input to an input selector    and your TV must be connected to either the HDMI   output or COMPONENT VIDEO OUT     If the video source is connected to a composite video 17  input  your TV must be connected to the HDMI  output or the corresponding composite video output     If the video source is connected to an HDMI input  16 53  you must assign that input to an input selector  and    your TV must be connected to the HDMI output     While the Pure Audio listening mode is selected  the 38  video circuitry is turned off and only video signals   input through HDMI IN can be output    On your TV  make sure that the video input to which      the AV receiver is connected is selected     Bi There s no picture from a source connected to  an HDMI IN       Reliable operation with an HDMI to DVI adapter is 95  not guaranteed  In addition  video signals from a PC  are not guaranteed     When the resolution is set to any resolution not 53  supported by the TV  no video is output from the  HDMI output     If the message    Resolution Error  appears on the      AV receiver   s display  this indicates that your TV   does not support the current video resolution and you  need to select another resolution on your DVD   player     E The on screen menus don t appear   
217. ng On 8 Basic Operations    B Listening to Traffic News  TP     You can search for stations that broadcast traffic news     1 Press RT PTY TP three times   Tf the current radio station is broadcasting TP  Traffic  Program       TP     will appear on the AV receiver   s  display  If    TP    without square brackets appears  this  means that the station is not broadcasting TP     2 To locate a station that is broadcasting TP  press  ENTER   The AV receiver searches until it finds a station that   s  broadcasting TP     Tf no stations are found  the message    Not Found     appears                                                                                                        RDS program types  PTY    Type Display  None None  News reports News  Current affairs Affairs  Information Info  Sport Sport  Education Educate  Drama Drama  Culture Culture  Science and technology Science  Varied Varied  Pop music Pop M  Rock music Rock M  Middle of the road music Easy M  Light classics Light M  Serious classics Classics  Other music Other M  Weather Weather  Finance Finance  Children   s programmes Children  Social affairs Social  Religion Religion  Phone in Phone In  Travel Travel  Leisure Leisure  Jazz music Jazz  Country music Country  National music Nation M  Oldies music Oldies  Folk music Folk M  Documentary Document  Alarm test TEST  Alarm Alarm           Playing Audio and Video from Separate    Sources       You can listen to the audio of one input source while  watching th
218. nkyo   Saisissez votre code d activation puis suivez les  instructions pour cr  er votre compte Pandora et vos  stations webradio Pandora personnalis  es  Lorsque  vous y   tes invit  s  vous pouvez cr  er vos stations en  saisissant vos chansons et vos artistes pr  f  r  s  Apr  s  la cr  ation de votre compte et de vos stations  vous  pouvez retourner    votre r  cepteur Onkyo et appuyez  sur entr  e pour   couter votre webradio Pandora  personnalis  e    Si vous disposez d un compte Pandora  vous pouvez  ajouter votre compte Pandora    votre r  cepteur Onkyo  en s  lectionnant    I have a Pandora Account    et y  acc  der en entrant votre adresse e mail et votre mot de  passe     Conseil      Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes utilisateur   consultez    Utilisation de plusieurs comptes      page 1    L identification peut   tre r  alis  e    partir de l   cran     Users        2 Pour lire une station  utilisez A V pour s  lectionner    la station dans votre liste de stations  puis appuyez  sur ENTER    La lecture d  bute et l   cran de lecture s affiche   Create a New Station     Saisissez le nom d une chanson  d un artiste ou d un  genre et Pandora cr  era une station radio unique pour  vous en fonction des qualit  s musicales de la chanson   de l artiste ou du genre choisi     E El  ments du menu   I like this song     Acceptez la chanson et Pandora lira d autres musiques  similaires    I don t like this song     Rejetez la chanson et Pandora   liminera cette c
219. not work     sure to connect the main stereo        En  s V       Connecting the Antennas    This section explains how to connect the supplied indoor FM antenna and AM loop antenna   The AV receiver won t pick up any radio signals without any antenna connected  so you must connect the antenna to use    the tuner     Ao  p      Push  Insert wire     Assembling the AM loop antenna      5 9    AM loop antenna  supplied     Note    Release        European  Australian  and Asian models    North American and  Taiwanese models                         into the jack  into the jack     Insert the bre fully xxl pa plug fully                careful not to injure yourself  when using thumbtacks         Thumbtacks  etc   m    Cy 1          Indoor FM antenna  supplied       Once your AV receiver is ready for use  you ll need to tune into a radio station and position the antenna to achieve the best possible    reception       Keep the AM loop antenna as far away as possible from your AV receiver  TV  speaker cables  and power cords     Tip      If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied indoor FM antenna  try a commercially available outdoor FM antenna instead     If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied indoor AM loop antenna  try using it with a commercially available outdoor AM    antenna             19       Connections       Connecting the Power Cord    1  European  Australian  Asian and Taiwanese  models     Connect the supplied power cord to the AV  receiver 
220. nual for details     Network USB Features    The following diagram shows how you can connect the AV  receiver to your home network  In this example  it   s  connected to a LAN port on a router  which has a 4 port  100Base TX switch built in     Internet radio    4  Non  4                     m                                                                                                      L    Computer or media server    Network Requirements    B Ethernet Network   For the best results  a 100Base TX switched Ethernet  network is recommended  Although it s possible to play  music on a computer that s connected to the network  wirelessly  playback may be unreliable  so it is  recommended to use wired connections     B Ethernet Router   A router manages the network  data routing and supplying   of IP addresses  Your router must support the following      NAT  Network Address Translation   NAT allows  several networked computers to access the Internet  simultaneously via a single Internet connection  The AV  receiver needs Internet access for Internet radio      DHCP  Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol   DHCP  supplies IP addresses to the network devices  allowing  them to configure themselves automatically      A router with a built in 100Base TX switch is  recommended    Some routers have a built in modem  and some Internet   Service Providers  ISP  require you to use specific routers    Please consult your ISP or computer dealer if you re   unsure     Bi CAT5 Ethernet cab
221. o                 sen 31  Playing Audio and Video from Separate Sources      34  Using Basic FunctiOnS                ssssannsansse 35  Using the Automatic Speaker                                     35  Using the Listening Modes                                         38  Using the Home Menu    Using the Sleep Timer    Setting the Display Brightness                                    46  Displaying Source Information                                    46    Changing the Input Display  Selecting Speaker Layout                 Using the Whole House                                            47  Muting the AV                                                                47  Using           saco nas 47    Advanced Operations    Oncecreen SOU en 48             Using the Quick Setup        Using the Audio Settings of Quick Setup     Using the Setup Menu  HOME                       About the HYBRID STANDBY Indicator                     D2  Setup Menu ltems                             sess 452  Input Output Assign    5    Speaker                   08  Audio Adjust      98  Source Setup                    60  Listening Mode Preset     64  Miscellaneous                 485    Hardware Setup                 Remote Controller Setup   a  LOCK SOU nano 69       Ene Y    Safety Information and Introduction    Multi LONA  70  Making Multi Zone Connections                                 70  Controlling Multi Zone Components                           71  Using the Remote Controller in   Zon
222. o    preconfigurato con preselezioni per diversi apparecchi  Inserendo un codice  dall elenco dei codici telecomando     possibile attivare la relativa preselezione per tale  apparecchio      Se sono presenti pi   codici relativi allo stesso produttore  provare a inserirli uno a uno finch    non si arrivi al codice corrispondente dell apparecchio      A seconda del modello e dell anno dell apparecchio  la compatibilit   non    garantita        Con alcuni modelli  il telecomando        non funzionare o la sua compatibilit          essere limitata  a una parte della funzionalit   dell apparecchio       noltre  non    possibile aggiungere nuovi codici alle preselezioni esistenti del telecomando        codici telecomando specificati sono validi alla data della stampa del presente documento  ma  sono soggetti a variazioni da parte del produttore     Remote Control Codes    Fernbedienungscodes    1 Halten Sie die REMOTE MODE Taste gedruckt  fur die Sie den Code eingeben    mochten  und drucken Sie  ca  3 Sekunden lang  die  DISPLAY   Taste    Die REMOTE MODE Taste Remote Anzeige leuchtet    Bei den Integra Produkten werden die Namen der Tasten grof geschrieben  Zum   Beispiel    Remote Mode     Fernbedienungsmodus  Taste und    Display    Taste    Hinweise      Der Fernbedienungscode kann nicht  RECEIVER  und der Multi Zonen Taste zugeordnet  werden      Der Taste  TV  k  nnen nur Fernbedienungscodes f  r einen Fernseher zugeordnet werden      Abgesehen von  RECEIVER    TV  und der
223. o la contrase  a  llame a  Sirius XM al n  mero  888  539 7474 para solicitar  asistencia     Consejo      Si desea utilizar m  ltiples cuentas de usuario  consulte    Uso  de m  ltiples cuentas      gt  p  gina 1   Se puede iniciar  sesi  n desde la pantalla    Users        E Utilizaci  n de la pantalla de teclado    1  Utilice A W        y ENTER para introducir su  nombre de usuario y su contrase  a    2  Seleccione    OK       3  Pulse ENTER  Aparecer   la pantalla    Confirm  your entries       4  Pulse ENTER    Aparecer      Please wait       y despu  s la pantalla      SiriusXM Internet Radio     que muestra la categor  a   disponible para la selecci  n     2 Utilice    Y para seleccionar la categor  a y luego    pulse ENTER   Aparece una pantalla con una lista de emisoras de la  categor  a seleccionada     3 Utilice A V para seleccionar la emisora deseada y    luego pulse ENTER    Aparecer   la pantalla de reproducci  n de la emisora  seleccionada y ahora usted podr   escuchar SiriusXM  Internet Radio    Puede controlar las pistas con los botones del mando a  distancia     Botones activados  Bl  11  a lt    gt  gt     E Elementos del menu  Add to My Favorites   A  ade una emisora a la lista Mis favoritos        Es4 V    Uso de Internet Radio      Siriusxm       INTERNET RADIO  Las suscripciones a SiriusXM Internet Radio se venden por  separado y se rigen por las condiciones de Sirius  consulte  www sirius com   Lea atentamente este acuerdo antes de  comprar la suscripc
224. ol the tracks with the buttons on the  remote control     Enabled buttons  Bl  EE  a lt    gt  gt     E Menu Items  Add to My Favorites   Adds a channel to My Favorites list        En4 V    Using Internet Radio      Siriusxm       INTERNET RADIO  SiriusXM Internet Radio subscriptions are sold separately  and are governed by the Sirius Terms and Conditions  see  www sirius com   Be sure to read this agreement before  you purchase your subscription  Sirius  XM and all related  marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc   and its subsidiaries  All rights reserved     Using Last fm Internet Radio    Last fm is a music service that learns what you love     Your new Onkyo AV receiver is very clever  If you have a  free Last fm account  it will keep track of all the songs  you ve just played  When you visit the Last fm website   you can see personal charts of the music you   ve enjoyed   share them with friends and see what they like  too     With thousands of biographies  reviews and an endless  choice of personalised  ad free radio stations  Last fm is a  great way to discover music  Pick up your free Last fm  account today at www last fm join    Get a subscription and you can enjoy the best of ad free  Last fm Radio on your Onkyo AV receiver without a  computer    Recommended Radio    Discover smart personalised recommendations that adapt  as your tastes change    Artist Radio    Pick any artist and we   ll play you a whole station of music  inspired by your choice    
225. olby TrueHD AL 13 1115 1117 11  2                            Listening Mode Description Input Speaker  Source  Layout  DTS In this mode  audio from the input source is 8 15 17 1  output without surround sound processing   DES The speaker configuration  presence of  DTS HD High speakers   crossover frequency  speaker 8 15 17 1  Resolution Audio distance  A V Sync and much of the 3151712  processing set via the audio setup are  DTS HD HR  enabled  See    On screen Setup    for more  DTS HD Master details   gt  page 48   315 171         81151071  DTS HD         DTS Express  8 1  5 1  7 1   DTS Express  DTS 96 245 This mode is for use with DTS 96 24  8 1  5 1  7 1   sources  This is high resolution DTS with a  DISSES Lee 96 kHz sampling rate and 24 bit resolution   providing superior fidelity  Use it with  DVDs that bear the DTS 96 24 logo   DTS ES Discrete 6 This mode is for use with DTS ES Discrete 7 1 SB    soundtracks  which use a discrete surround  SERRE back channel for true 6 1 7 1 channel  playback  The seven totally separate audio  channels provide better spatial imaging and  360 degree sound localization  perfect for  sounds that pan across the surround  channels  Use it with DVDs that bear the  DTS ES logo  especially those with a DTS   ES Discrete soundtrack   DTS ES Matrix 6 This mode is for use with DTS ES Matrix    ES Matrix       soundtracks  which use a matrix encoded  back channel for 6 1 7 1 channel playback   Use it with DVDs that bear the DTS ES  logo  especi
226. onnected to HDMI OUT MAIN  If your TV is  connected to other video outputs  use the AV  receiver   s display when changing settings     1 Press RECEIVER followed by HOME   The Home menu will be superimposed on the TV  screen        2 Use  lt   gt  or A Y and ENTER to make the desired  selection   Press HOME to close the menu     Bi Network Service    You need to connect the AV receiver to your home  network   gt  page 96         With this selection  you can use various Internet radio    services or play the contents stored in media connected  to your home network  DLNA    gt  pages 27 to 29    Note that this selection will be grayed out for a short  while after the AV receiver is turned on  Please wait  until it becomes operable   Press ENTER to display the network service screen   If you want to use the Internet radio services  use              gt  to select the desired service  Pressing  ENTER again switches to that selection  If you want  to play music files on a server  use A V  4    to  select    DLNA    and then press ENTER     E USB       With this selection  you can play contents of portable    players  iPod  etc   and USB storage devices connected  to the AV receiver   s USB port   gt  pages 25  26    Note that this selection will be grayed out for a short  while after the AV receiver is turned on  Please wait  until it becomes operable   First  press USB repeatedly to select the     USB Front     or    USB Rear     input   Then  press ENTER to select a drive or brow
227. or on  default    Tip      North American and Taiwanese models  Alternatively   you can use DIMMER on the AV receiver     Displaying Source Information    You can display various information about the current  input source as follows     1 Press RECEIVER once followed by DISPLAY  repeatedly to cycle through the available  information     Tip      Alternatively  you can use DISPLAY on the AV receiver     The following information can be typically displayed        Input source      Listening mode                    Signal format             Sampling                       frequency  Input signal 1          resolution         Output resolution           1 Tf the input signal is digital  the signal format is displayed   Information is displayed for about three seconds  then the  previously displayed information reappears     A      46          Turning On  amp  Basic Operations    Changing the Input Display    When you connect      fAl capable Onkyo component  you    must configure the input display so that RI can work  properly   This setting can be done only from the front panel     1    2    Press TV CD or GAME       TV CD    or    GAME    appears on the AV receiver   s  display    Press and hold down the same button  about   3 seconds  to change the input display    Repeat this step to select the desired input display     B TV CD  TV CD     DOCK  T  TAPE  lt   E GAME  GAME e DOCK  Note       DOCK  can be selected for the    TV CD    or    GAME     input selector  but not at the
228. ou can set the time until the screen saver  activates itself  Once active  the screen saver will go off  and the screen will return to its previous state if the AV  receiver is operated in any way        En 66 Y    Advanced Operations    Hardware Setup       1 2 3    gt      gt   META Hardware Setup  Tuner       AM FM Frequency Step  North American and  Taiwanese models    gt  10      200         gt  9kHz 50kHz   Select the frequency step according to your area     E AM Frequency Step  European  Australian and  Asian models    gt  10kHz    gt  9kHz   Select the frequency step according to your area   For AM FM tuning to work properly  you must specify the  AM FM frequency step used in your area        Note      When this setting is changed  all radio presets will be deleted     HDMI    E HDMI Control RIHD    gt  Off   gt On    Turn this setting on to allow f RIFLD  compatible  components connected via HDMI to be controlled by the  AV receiver   gt  page 93      Note      When the setting is set to    On    and the menu is closed  the names  of connected HD  compatible components and    RIHD On     are displayed on the AV receiver       Search        gt      name      gt     RIHD On      When the AV receiver cannot receive the name of the component   it is displayed as    Player     or    Recorder      etc     shows up  and indicates the number of components  when two or more are  received      When      MIHID compatible component is connected to the  AV receiver via an HDMI c
229. oudness  just turn down the volume  control by 4 dB  However  unlike a movie theater where  the playback loudness is preset  you can choose your  preferred volume setting for best enjoyment        A En59 Y    Advanced Operations  DTS    Bi Neo 6 Music    Center Image    0to2to5  The DTS Neo 6 Music listening mode creates 6 channel  surround sound from 2 channel stereo sources  With this  setting  you can specify by how much the front left and  right channel output is attenuated in order to create the  center channel   Changing the value from    0    to    5    will spread the sound  of the center channel to left and right  outwards      Audyssey DSX      E Soundstage    gt   3dB to Reference to  3dB  With this setting  you can adjust the sound stage when using  Audyssey DSX     Note      This listening mode can be selected only when all the following  conditions are satisfied       The center speaker is connected       Either the front high or front wide speakers are connected       Powered Zone 2 is not in use     Theater Dimensional    E Listening Angle     Wide        Select if the listening angle is greater than 30 degrees        Narrow    Select if the listening angle is less than 30 degrees   With this setting  you can optimize the Theater   Dimensional listening mode by specifying the angle of the  front left and right speakers relative to the listening  position  Ideally  the front left and right speakers should be  equidistant from the listening position and at an an
230. our Neighbourhood    and     Y our Recommendations         A En5       Using Internet Radio    Profile    You can play tracks from    Recently Listened  Tracks        Library    and    Neighbours      Account Info    Confirm your account information    Sign Out    It signs out from your account        Use A V to select a station  and press ENTER or  gt   to start playback   Playback starts and the playback screen appears     E Menu Items   I Love this track    Track information is saved in Last fm server  and  playback frequency increases    Ban this track    Track information is saved in Last fm server  and  playback frequency reduces    Add to My Favorites    Adds a station to My Favorites list     B Using scrobbling control  Use A F to select    Enable     and then press ENTER     Internet radio services provided by a third party may be    terminated with or without notice   Internet radio services may not be available in some areas     Using Slacker Personal Radio    1    If you do not have an account  create one on the  Slacker website  www slacker com  with your  computer    If you already have a Slacker account  select    Sign  in to your account    and then press ENTER    The keyboard screen appears  You can enter  information from the remote control or the keys on the  main unit     If there are no mistakes in the information you have    entered  use        4     to select    OK    then press  ENTER   An account information confirmation screen appears   If you do not
231. our iPod iPhone  connect it to the  USB port and VIDEO jack on the AV receiver   s front panel   using the official Apple Composite AV Cable      Depending on your iPod iPhone model and generation  the  displayed items may vary and the support for Extended Mode   Video  is not guaranteed     Standard Mode Control    The content information is not displayed  but can be  operated using the iPod iPhone or the remote controller     Playing a USB Device    The on screen information appears only on a TV that  is connected to HDMI outputs     This section explains how to play music files from a USB  device  e g   USB flash drives and MP3 players     See also       Network USB Features      gt  page 96      1 Press USB repeatedly to select the  USB Front   or   USB Rear   input    2 Plug your USB device into the AV receiver s USB  port   The USB indicator lights  It will flash if the AV  receiver cannot read the USB device    3 Press ENTER   A list of the device s contents appears  To open a  folder  use A F to select it  and then press ENTER     4  Use A Y to select a music file  and press ENTER or     to start playback     Note      While the message    Connecting       appears on the AV receiver   s  display  do not disconnect the USB cable supplied with your  iPod iPhone or the USB device from the USB port        En26 Y    Turning On  amp  Basic Operations    Listening to VTuner Internet Radio    You need to connect the AV receiver to your home  network   gt  page 96   The on scr
232. our subwoofer  while playing  a movie or some music with good bass  experiment by  placing your subwoofer at various positions within the  room  and choose the one that provides the most satisfying  results   You can connect the powered subwoofer with two  SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jacks respectively   The same signal is output from each jack    Tip    If your subwoofer is unpowered and you re using an external    amplifier  connect the subwoofer pre out jack to an input on the  amplifier     Bi amping the Front Speakers    Important      When making the bi amping connections  be sure to remove  the jumper bars that link the speakers  tweeter  high  and  woofer  low  terminals      Bi amping can be used only with speakers that support bi   amping  Refer to your speaker manual     Bi amping provides improved bass and treble performance     When bi amping is used  the AV receiver is able to drive  up to a 5 1 speaker system in the main room    Once you ve completed the bi amping connections as  shown and turned on the AV receiver  you must set the  speaker setting to enable bi amping   page 55            Tweeter  high     Woofer  low                          Front right Front left       En 14 Y    Connections  Connecting a Power Amplifier    Tf you want to use a more powerful power amplifier  you  can use the AV receiver as a preamp  Connect all speaker  outputs to the power amplifier  See the manuals supplied  with your amplifier for details     Note     1 Specify    None    for any c
233. ovie soundtracks for home theater       playback         a    2EQ AUDYSSEY   DYNAMIC VOLUME   Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories     Inc   U S  and foreign patents pending  Audyssey 2EQ      Audyssey Dynamic EQ    Audyssey Dynamic Volume   and  Audyssey DSX   are registered trademarks of   Audyssey Laboratories  Inc           DLNA    the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED    are  trademarks  service marks  or certification marks of the Digital  Living Network Alliance           Windows and the Windows logo are trademarks of the Microsoft  group of companies        Qdeo and QuietVideo are trademarks of Marvell or its affiliates           Xantech    is a registered trademark of Xantech Corporation           Niles    is a registered trademark of Niles Audio Corporation        Re Equalization and the    Re EQ    logo are trademarks of  THX Ltd                    ImstaPlrevue     InstaPrevue and the InstaPrevue logo are trademarks or  registered trademarks of Silicon Image  Inc  in the United States  and other countries        Made for    S iPod iPhone                                           iPhone  iPod  iPod classic  iPod nano  iPod shuffle  and   iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc   registered in the U S   and other countries       Made for iPod  and    Made for iPhone  mean that an electronic  accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or  iPhone  respectively  and has been certified by the developer to  meet Apple performance standards  App
234. phonic 10171  11394  Protech 10037  10668  11037 Sampo 10178  10171  10650  Sinudyne 10037 Synco 10178  11755  Proton 10178 11755 SKY 10037  11614  11775 Syntax 11610  Pro Vision 10556  10037  10714  Samsung   m E Skyworth 10037  10698 Sysline 10037  11324 12051       Sliding 11324 Tacico 10178  Pan 12001 Sansui 10171  10037  10714  SLX 10608 Tale 10178  Pye 10556  10037 11248  12001 Solavox 10037 Tashiko 10650  Qingdao 10208 Sanyo 11037  10508  10208  Soniko 10037 Tatung 10037  11248  11324  Quasar 10650 11142  11365  11585  Soniq 12493 TCL 10698  12403  12429   Quelle 10037  10668  10195  11667  11974 Sonitron 10208 12434  13183  11037  10512 SBR 10556  10037 Sonneclair 10037 TCM 10714  12001  R Line 10037 Schaub Lorenz 10714  11324  11363  Sonoko 10037 Teac 10178  10171  10037   Radiola 10556  10037 11667  12001 a T0208 10714  10668  11037   Radiomarelli 10037 Schneider 10556  10037  10714  10698  10512  11248   10668  11037 Sontec 10037 11363  11709  11755  RadioShack 10178  10037   Son 10810  11505  11167  5 Schoentech 11037 y i   i Tec 10037  Radiotone 10037  10668  11037 11651  11825 7  Scotch 10178 Tech Line 10037  10668  RCA 10178  11454  10625     TET Soundesign 10178 Technica 11037  10560  10618  11781  cott Soundwave 10037  11037  10715 2  12247  12403  12429  Sears 10178  10171 5 TET Technics 10556  10650  12434  12746  12932 Seaway 10634 2 Technika 11667  Realistic 10178 TEE 11037 Squareview        TechniSat 10556  Standard 10037  11037  11709  Recor 10037 SEG 1
235. ponent to a component video  input  you must assign that input to an input selector  For  example  if you connect your Blu ray Disc DVD player to  COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2  you must assign    IN2    to  the    BD DVD    input selector     Here are the default assignments        Input selector Default assignment       BD DVD IN1       CBL SAT IN2       STB DVR       GAME       PC                           Fixed        TV CD          PHONO       E BD DVD  CBL SAT  STB DVR  GAME  PC  TV CD   PHONO     IN1  IN2   Select the input to which the component has been  connected     Output composite video sources from the HDMI  output     Note  e    AUX    is fixed to the                option        En54       Advanced Operations  Digital Audio Input    If you connect a component to a digital audio input  you  must assign that input to an input selector  For example  if  you connect your CD player to the OPTICAL IN 1  you  must assign    OPTICAL1    to the    TV CD    input selector   Here are the default assignments                                Input selector Default assignment  BD DVD COAXIALI  CBL SAT COAXIAL2  STB DVR COAXIAL3   GAME OPTICAL1   PC          AUX         Fixed    TV CD OPTICAL2   PHONO                     E BD DVD  CBL SAT  STB DVR  GAME  PC  TV CD   PHONO   gt  COAXIAL1  COAXIAL2  COAXIAL3   OPTICAL1  OPTICAL2   Select the input to which the component has been  connected     Select if the component is connected to an analog  audio input     Note      When an HDMI IN is
236. ponents  see the 4 Use A V to select    Remote Mode Setup     and then  indicated pages  press ENTER     5 Use A Y to select a remote mode  and then press   BD DVD Onkyo Blu ray Disc player   gt  page 78  ENTER     TV CD Onkyo CD player   gt  page 77   STB DVR Apple TV    The menu of category selection appears     6 Use A V to select a category  and then press  ENTER     The keyboard screen for brand name input appears     7 Use A      lt   gt  to select a character  and then press  ENTER   Repeat this step for the first three characters of the  brand name   When you have entered the 3rd character  select   Search  and press ENTER   A list of brand names is retrieved   If the desired brand name is not found   Use  gt  to select    Not Listed     and then press  ENTER   The keyboard screen for brand name input appears            75 Y           Entering Remote Control Codes    You ll need to enter a code for each component that you  want to control     1 Look up the appropriate remote control code in the  separate Remote Control Codes list   The codes are organized by category  e g   DVD  player  TV  etc       2 While holding down the REMOTE MODE button to  which you want to assign a code  press and hold  down DISPLAY  about 3 seconds     The remote indicator lights     Note      Remote control codes cannot be entered for RECEIVER  and the multi zone button    Only TV remote control codes can be entered for TV   Except for RECEIVER  TV  and the multi zone button   remote contro
237. ppendix  Bi Video Inputs    Component         IN2   Composite BD DVD  CBL SAT  STB DVR  GAME   USB   Analog RGB PCIN   E Video Outputs   Component MONITOR OUT   Composite MONITOR OUT      Audio Inputs   Digital Optical  2  Coaxial  3    Analog BD DVD  CBL SAT  STB DVR  GAME     PC  TV CD  PHONO     Audio Outputs    Analog ZONE2 LINE OUT  ZONE3 LINE OUT   Analog Multichannel Pre Outputs  7   Subwoofer Pre Outputs  2   Speaker Outputs Main  L  R  C  SL  SR  SBL  SBR    Front  Wide ZONE2  L  R    Front High ZONE3   L  R    Phones 1 6 3 9    B Others   Setup Mic 1   RI 1   USB 1  Front  1  Rear    Ethernet 1   TR Input 1   12 V Trigger Out 1    Specifications and features are subject to change  without notice             Appendix    Memo    A En 101 Y ley Q    Appendix    Memo       En 102 Y ley Q    Appendix    Memo       En 103 Y ley Q    ONKYO    Onkyo Sound  amp Vision Corporation   2 1  Nisshin cho  Neyagawa shi  OSAKA 572 8540  JAPAN  Tel  072 831 8023 Fax  072 831 8163  http   www onkyo com     Onkyo U S A  Corporation   18 Park Way  Upper Saddle River  N J  07458  U S A   Tel  800 229 1687  201 785 2600 Fax  201 785 2650  http   www us onkyo com     Onkyo Europe Electronics GmbH  Liegnitzerstrasse 6  82194 Groebenzell  GERMANY  Tel   49 8142 4401 0 Fax   49 8142 4208 213  http   www eu onkyo com     Onkyo Europe Electronics GmbH  UK Branch   The Coach House 81A High Street  Marlow  Buckinghamshire  SL7 1AB  UK  Tel   44  0 1628 473 350 Fax   44  0 1628 401 700    Onkyo Ch
238. r router is configured properly   See the instruction manual of the router    If your network allows only one client  connection and there is any other device  already connected  the AV receiver will not be  able to access the network  Consult your  Internet Service Provider  ISP     If your modem does not function as a router   you will need a router  Depending on your  network  you may need to configure the proxy  server if necessary  See the document  provided by your ISP  If you are still unable to  access the Internet  the DNS or proxy server  may be temporarily down  Contact your ISP        Others Retry the update procedure from the beginning   If the error persists  please contact Onkyo  Support   gt  page 89  and provide the error    code           A      87       Appendix    Case 2   If an error occurs during the update process  disconnect  then reconnect the AC power cord and try again     Case 3   If you do not have an Internet connection to the network   please contact Onkyo Support   gt  page 89      Updating the Firmware via USB    The AV receiver allows you to update the firmware using a  USB device     Note     Never unplug or turn off the AV receiver during the update  process      Never plug or unplug an HDMI cable or a USB device during the  update process      Never unplug the USB storage device containing the firmware  file or the AC power cord during the update process      Do not attempt to access the AV receiver from your PC while it  is being updated 
239. r supports HDCP  High bandwidth Digital  Content Protection  2  a copy protection system for digital  video signals  Other devices connected to the AV receiver  via HDMI must also support HDCP      1 DVI  Digital Visual Interface   The digital display interface  standard set by the DDWG 3 in 1999     2 HDCP  High bandwidth Digital Content Protection   The  video encryption technology developed by Intel for  HDMI DVL It   s designed to protect video content and requires  a HDCP compatible device to display the encrypted video     8 DDWG  Digital Display Working Group   Lead by Intel   Compaq  Fujitsu  Hewlett Packard  IBM  NEC  and Silicon  Image  this open industry group   s objective is to address the  industry   s requirements for a digital connectivity specification  for high performance PCs and digital displays     Note      The HDMI video stream is compatible with DVI  Digital Visual  Interface   so TVs and displays with a DVI input can be  connected by using an HDMI to DVI adapter cable   Note that  DVI connections only carry video  so you ll need to make a  separate connection for audio   However  reliable operation with  such an adapter is not guaranteed  In addition  video signals from  a PC are not supported    The HDMI audio signal  sampling rate  bit length  etc   may be  restricted by the connected source component  If the picture is  poor or there s no sound from a component connected via HDMI   check its setup  Refer to the connected component s instruction  ma
240. r the Dolby Pro Logic II logo     Neo 6 Music    Neo 6    TV  DVD  VHS      DTS Neo 6 Music  Use this mode with any stereo music source     e g   CD  radio  cassette  TV  VHS  DVD           DTS Neo 6  This mode uses DTS Neo 6 to expand 5 1   channel sources for 6 1 7 1 channel  playback     7 1 SB       Audyssey DSX 8    Audyssey DSX         Dolby PLIIx Movie     Dolby PLIIx Music  These modes use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx  modes to expand 5 1 channel sources for  7 1 channel playback     mio   gt  4          7 1 SB       Dolby Pro Logic 112  Height    PLIz Height    Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height is designed to  more effectively use existing program  material when height channel speaker  outputs are present  Dolby Pro Logic Hz  Height can be used to upmix a variety of  sources from movies and music  but are  particularly well suited to upmix game  content              m  20       9     7 1 FH       Dolby EX    Dolby EX    Dolby D EX       These modes expand 5 1 channel sources for  6 1 7 1 channel playback  They re especially  suited to Dolby EX soundtracks that include  a matrix encoded surround back channel   The additional channel adds an extra  dimension and provides an enveloping  surround sound experience  perfect for  rotating and fly by sound effects        a       E  091 Gad          2  mp  JoJo  5  lt HPP    H  m  x        7 1 SB       Audyssey DSX   Audyssey DSX   is a scalable system that  adds new speakers to improve surround  impression  Starting with a 5 1 system  A
241. re a name to its default  erase all characters with CLR   select  OK  and then press ENTER   Note     This setting cannot be used for the NET and USB input selectors        Ene2 V       Advanced Operations  Picture Adjust    Using Picture Adjust  you can adjust the picture quality  and reduce any noise appearing on the screen    To view the TV picture while setting  press ENTER  To  return to the previous screen  press RETURN     E Wide Mode     This setting determines the aspect ratio    gt  4 3         gt  Wide Zoom         gt  Auto   According to the input signals and monitor output  setting  the AV receiver automatically selects the     4 3        Full        Zoom    or    Wide Zoom  mode  See     Monitor Out  for details on the monitor output  setting  3 page 53         E Picture Mode       Custom   All settings can be performed manually      Cinema   Select when the picture source is a movie or alike      Game   Select when the video source is a game console    gt  Through   Does not adjust picture quality  changes resolution     gt  Direct   Does not adjust picture quality  does not change  resolution   The video coming from an analog input  and output by the HDMI output is processed in the  same way as    Through      With    Picture Mode     you can change the following  settings to be suitable for the movie or game screen by one  operation     Game Mode        Film Mode        Edge  Enhancement        Noise Reduction        Brightness         Contrast        Hue    
242. reen information  appears only on a TV that is connected to HDMI    outputs    5 press ENTER  You need to connect your TV to the HDMI output  Internet radio URLs in the following formats are  HDMI OUT MAIN  to make the following on screen  supported  PLS  M3U  and podcast  RSS   However  Tip setting   depending on the type of data or audio format used by the   If you want to add a new station directly from    My Favorites     Internet radio station  you may not be able to listen to some select an empty slot in the list and press MENU  Then  select 1 Press NET   stations   Create New Station  and press ENTER  The network service screen appears  and the NET  To listen to other Internet radio stations  you must register Pressing ENTER again will display the keyboard screen  Use that indicator lights  If it flashes  verify that the Ethernet    keyboard to enter the station s name and URL respectively  and    your station in  My Favorites  of the network service  then press ENTER     screen  as described below     cable is firmly connected to the AV receiver       If you want to delete a station saved in  My Favorites   press Tip  Note MENU with the station selected or while the station is playing    The same operation can be done by selecting  Network    Services available may vary depending on the region  See the Then  use       to select    Delete from My Favorites    and press Service    in the Home menu   ins i re i ion  ENTER  You can also delete stations from the Web Setup 
243. ro Logic          Music   THX  THX Founded by George Lucas  THX develops Music  stringent standards that ensure movies are   Dolby Pro Logic          Game   THX  reproduced in movie theaters and home Games  theaters just as the director intended  THX The combination of Dolby Pro Logic  Modes carefully optimize the tonal and II IIx7 and THX Cinema Music Games  spatial characteristics of the soundtrack for modes can be used   reproduction in the home theater   The PLIVPLIIx and THX indicators light  environment  They can be used with 2  on the AV receiver s display   channel matrixed and multichannel sources        Surround back speaker output depends      i Dolby Pro Logic      Movie   THX  the source material and the selected listening Cinema           mode    Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music   THX Music    THX Cinema Ba The combination of Dolby Pro Logic IIx  THX Cinema THX Cinema mode corrects theatrical     Cinema Music modes can be  SHX NESTE soundtracks for playback       home theater The PLIIx and THX indicators light on the  environment  In this mode  THX Loudness   px nuce  Plus is configured for cinema levels and AV receiver b display   THX Games Re EQ  Timbre Matching  and Adaptive   Dolby Pro Logic Iz Height   THX       Decorrelation are active    THX Music   THX Music mode is tailored for listening to  music  which is typically mastered at  significantly higher levels than movies  In  this mode  THX Loudness Plus is  configured for music playback and only  Timbre Matchin
244. s AC INLET     To AC wall outlet       2 Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet     Note      Before connecting the power cord  connect all of your  speakers and AV components     Turning on the AV receiver may cause a momentary power surge  that might interfere with other electrical equipment on the same  circuit  If this is a problem  plug the AV receiver into a different  branch circuit   Do not use a power cord other than the one supplied with the AV  receiver  The supplied power cord is designed exclusively for use  with the AV receiver and should not be used with any other  equipment   Never disconnect the power cord from the AV receiver while the  other end is still plugged into a wall outlet  Doing so may cause  an electric shock  Always disconnect the power cord from the  wall outlet first  and then the AV receiver     Turning On Off the AV  Receiver    OON STANDBY     ON STANDEY    O       RECEIVER  DISPLAY SOURCE                     om          REMOTE MODE INPUT SELECTOR     aL I SAT JN STB DvP   e    ZONES     Gane         qm   RECEIVER  prono        aq      TOP MENU MENU    SP GUIDE PREV CH  PLAYLIST PLAYLIST     e        1 Press OON STANDBY on the front panel   or    Press RECEIVER followed by ORECEIVER on the  remote controller   The AV receiver comes on and its display lights     Turning Off    1 Press OON STANDBY on the front panel   or    Press RECEIVER followed by ORECEIVER on the  remote controller    The AV receiver will enter standby mode  To prevent
245. se the  contents of the media connected  followed by       to  select the desired folder or track  Pressing ENTER as  a track is selected will start playback     Note    Only the front panel USB input is compatible with iPod iPhone        En45 Y    Turning On 8  Basic Operations    E InstaPrevue     With this selection  you can preview video streams   coming from HDMI inputs  HDMI IN 1 2 3 4 AUX   INPUT   Even with multiple components connected   through HDMI  you can easily switch between inputs   as their previews are displayed on a single screen   Press ENTER to display the main preview  currently  selected HDMI input  and the additional previews   other HDMI inputs   Using A V or  lt   gt  to select a  preview thumbnail and pressing ENTER will switch  the AV receiver to that input source     Tip     If no video signals are present  the thumbnails will be filled in  black      You can specify the number of preview thumbnails as well as  their positioning on screen   gt  page 68    Note     This function cannot be selected when       HDMI IN 5 6 7 is the current HDMI input source  or      No signal is present on the current input source      Depending on video signals  the picture may not be properly  rendered on the preview thumbnails of InstaPrevue     E Setup     With this selection  you can access the common  settings of the on screen Setup menu   Press ENTER to display the Setup menu   2 page 51      Tip    You can also access frequently used settings from Quick  Setup
246. set to    On    for the first time      If you set    Audio Return Channel    to    Auto     the    Audio  Selector    settings of the TV CD input selector will be  automatically switched to    ARC      gt  page 64      After changing the settings of the    HDMI  Control RIHD       HDMI Through    or    Audio  Return Channel     turn off the power on all connected    pieces of equipment and then turn them on again  Refer  to the user s manuals for all connected pieces of  equipment     E LipSync      Off    gt  On  This function allows the AV receiver to automatically  correct any delay between the video and the audio  based  on the data from the connected monitor     Note      This function works only if your HDMI compatible TV supports  HDMI Lip Sync     E InstaPrevue  These settings apply to    InstaPrevue    of the Home menu    gt  page 45  and specify the preview display of HDMI  video streams   Sub Window      Multi      Displays preview thumbnails all at once      Single   Displays preview thumbnails one by one    With this setting  you can set the number of preview  thumbnails displayed   Position   with    Sub Window    set to Multi            Top  Bottom  Left  Right   with    Sub Window    set to    Single          Upper Left  Upper Right  Lower Left  Lower Right  With this setting  you can set the position of preview  thumbnails on the TV screen     Note      Depending on video signals  the picture may not be properly  rendered on the preview thumbnails of InstaPr
247. sion  set the  Picture Mode  setting to   Direct    gt  page 63          Monitor Out  set to    Main    or    Sub     Video input signals flow through the AV receiver as  shown  with composite video  PC IN  Analog RGB   and  component video sources all being upconverted for the  HDMI output  Use these settings if you connect either  HDMI OUT MAIN or HDMI OUT SUB of the AV  receiver to your TV   The composite video and component video outputs pass  through their respective input signals as they are     Video Signal Flow Chart             Blu ray Disc DVD player  etc     t y v y    Composite PC IN Component HDMI   Analog RGB        AV receiver       MONITOR OUT    Composite Component HDMI    y y y    TV  projector  etc                 A En90 Y    Appendix          Monitor Out  set to  Both    Video input signals flow through the AV receiver as  shown  with composite video  PC IN  Analog RGB   and  component video sources all being upconverted for both  HDMI outputs  Use this setting if you connect both  HDMI OUT MAIN and HDMI OUT SUB of the AV  receiver to your TV    Note that video signals are output from both HDMI outputs  at the resolution supported by both TVs    The composite video and component video outputs pass  through their respective input signals as they are     Video Signal Flow Chart    Blu ray Disc DVD player  etc   Vv v y    Composite PC IN Component HDMI   Analog RGB        AV receiver       MONITOR OUT  Component HDMI    Composite    Y y    TV  projector  etc 
248. speakers are configured correctly  55    E The front high  front wide and surround back  speakers produce no sound    Appendix       Can t get 6 1 7 1 playback          Depending on the current listening mode  no sound 38  may be produced by the front high  front wide and  surround back speakers  Select another listening   mode     Depending on the sources  the sound produced by the      front high  front wide and surround back speakers  may be weak     Make sure the speakers are configured correctly  55    When Powered Zone 2 is used  playback in the main      room is reduced to 5 1 channels and the front high    front wide and surround back speakers produce no  sound    When Powered Zone 3 is used  playback in the main      room is reduced to 3 1channels and the front high    front wide and surround back speakers produce no   sound     E The subwoofer produces no sound    If no surround back speakers  front wide speakers and      front high speakers are connected  or the Zone 2 3   speakers are being used  6 1 7 1 playback is not   possible    Depending on the number of connected speakers  itis 38 44  not always possible to select all of the listening   modes     E The speaker volume cannot be set as required       Check to see if a maximum volume has been set  65    If the volume level of each individual speaker has 35  56  been adjusted to high positive values  then the   maximum master volume possible may be reduced    Note that the individual speaker volume levels are s
249. ss of color     E Installing the batteries    AS  en         A  O       pe    Batteries  AA R6     Note      If the remote controller doesn t work reliably  try replacing the  batteries      Don t mix new and old batteries or different types of batteries       f you intend not to use the remote controller for a long time   remove the batteries to prevent damage from leakage or  corrosion      Remove expired batteries as soon as possible to prevent damage  from leakage or corrosion     E Aiming the remote controller    To use the remote controller  point it at the AV receiver s  remote control sensor  as shown below     Remote control sensor        AV receiver    Approx  16 ft   5 m     Thank you for purchasing an Onkyo AV Receiver   Please read this manual thoroughly before making  connections and plugging in the unit     Following the instructions in this manual will  enable you to obtain optimum performance and  listening enjoyment from your new AV Receiver   Please retain this manual for future reference        A En5       Safety Information and Introduction    Table of Contents    Safety Information and Introduction         Important Safety                                                                2  Precautions                                3  Supplied Accessories     5  Table of Contents          6  Features                      7  Front   amp  Rear Panels  unse 8    Remote Controller    11    Connections    Connecting the AV                                       
250. stening mode and the dts indicator remains on  This   is to prevent noise when you use the pause  fast   forward  or fast reverse function on your player  If   you switch your player from DTS to PCM  you may   not hear any sound because the AV receiver does not  switch formats immediately  In such case  you should  stop your player for about three seconds and then   resume playback        With some CD and LD players  you won t be able to      playback DTS material properly even though your  player is connected to a digital input on the AV   receiver  This is usually because the DTS bitstream   has been processed  e g   output level  sampling rate    or frequency response changed  and the AV receiver  doesn t recognize it as a genuine DTS signal  In such  cases  you may hear noise     Playing DTS program material  using the pause  fast      forward  or fast reverse function on your player may  produce a short audible noise  This is not a   malfunction     E The beginning of audio received by an HDMI IN  can t be heard       Since it takes longer to identify the format of an      HDMI signal than it does for other digital audio  signals  audio output may not start immediately     Bi There s      sound during Whole House Mode       Make sure you ve selected an analog audio input  54    Bi There s no picture       Make sure that all video connecting plugs are pushed 15  in all the way     Make sure that each video component is properly 16  17    connected        If your TV is con
251. sume playback of the  song that was playing when you removed your iPod iPhone  from the Onkyo DS A2 RI Dock     Controlling Other Components    Controlli ng Other Looking up for Remote Control Codes 8 Use A V to select a brand  and then press ENTER     C t A remote control code with its instructions are  om po nents You can look up for an appropriate remote control code displayed  Follow the procedure   from the on screen menu           You can use the AV receiver   s remote controller to control 9 If you can control the component  use A V to select  your other AV components  This section explains how to    OK     and then press ENTER   enter the remote control code for a component that you You need to connect your TV to the HDMI output The on screen menu returns to the    Remote Mode  want to control  DVD  TV  CD  etc   HDMI OUT MAIN  to make the following on screen z           Setup    front screen   Preprogrammed Remote Control Press RECEIVER followed by HOME If you cannot control the component  use A V to  Codes 1 y   select    Try Next Code    and press ENTER   The next code is displayed    lt   gt   66 29     The following REMOTE MODE buttons are 2 Use  lt   gt  to select    Setup     and then press ENTER  preprogrammed with remote control codes for controlling 3 Use A V to select    Remote Controller Setup     and  the components listed  You do not need to enter a remote then press ENTER    control code to control these components   For details on controlling these com
252. t     Saisissez votre nom utilisateur et votre mot  de passe dans l     cran clavier suivant     B Utilisation de l   cran clavier   1  Utilisez A W    4    et le bouton ENTER pour  saisir votre nom d utilisateur et votre mot de  passe    2  S  lectionnez    OK       3  Appuyez sur ENTER  L   cran    Confirm your  entries    s affiche    4  Appuyez sur ENTER       Please wait       apparait puis l   cran    Last fm   Internet Radio    apparait     Conseil      Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes utilisateur   consultez    Utilisation de plusieurs comptes      page 1    L identification peut   tre r  alis  e    partir de l   cran     Users        2 Utilisez A Y pour s  lectionner un menu puis    appuyez sur ENTER    Search Station     Vous pouvez rechercher une station par artiste  par tag  ou par nom d utilisateur    Top Artists Station     Vous pouvez lire des pistes des artistes les mieux   valu  s   Top Tags Station     Vous pouvez lire des pistes des tags les mieux   valu  s   Personal Station     Vous pouvez lire des pistes de votre station  personnalis  e     Your Library        Your  Neighbourhood    et    Your Recommendations            Frs V    Utilisation d une webradio    Profile     Vous pouvez lire des pistes de    Recently Listened  Tracks        Library    et    Neighbours      Account Info     V  rifiez les informations de votre compte    Sign Out     Pour vous d  connecter de votre compte     3 Utilisez A V pour s  lectionner une station  puis  appuy
253. te      For proper linked operations  do not connect more f31IFLD    compatible components than the quantities specified below  to  the HDMI input terminal        Blu ray Disc DVD players  up to three        Blu ray Disc DVD recorders Digital Video Recorders  up to  three        Cable Satellite Set top boxes  up to four      Do not connect the AV receiver to another AV receiver AV  amplifier via HDMI      Proper linked operations are not guaranteed when more  RIHD  compatible components than the above mentioned  quantities are connected        En 93 Y    E For  RIFID  compatible TV   The following linked operations are enabled by connecting   the AV receiver to an  RIFLD compatible TV      The AV receiver will enter standby mode when the TV is  set to standby      You can set on the menu screen of the TV to either output  the audio from the speakers connected to the AV  receiver  or from the speakers of the TV      It is possible to output the audio coming from the tuner or  auxiliary input of your TV to the speakers of the AV  receiver   A connection such as an optical digital cable or  similar is required in addition to the HDMI cable       Input to the AV receiver can be selected with the remote  controller of the TV      Operations such as volume adjustment or similar for the  AV receiver can be performed from the remote controller  of the TV     E For RIHD compatible players recorders   The following linked operations are enabled by connecting   the AV receiver to an fRI
254. te display       Off   32dB to  17dB  Relative display   With this setting  you can limit the maximum volume   To disable this setting  select    Off        5          Power On Volume      Last  Min  1 to 99 or Max  Absolute display       Last   codB   81dB to  18dB  Relative display   With this preference  you can specify the volume setting to  be used each time the AV receiver is turned on    To use the same volume level that was used when the AV  receiver was turned off  select    Last       The    Power On Volume  setting cannot be set higher than  the  Maximum Volume  setting     E Headphone Level    gt   12dB to 0dB to  12dB  With this setting  you can specify the headphone volume  relative to the main volume  This is useful if there s a  volume difference between your speakers and your  headphones     OSD Setup    E On Screen Display    gt On    gt  Off  This preference determines whether operation details are  displayed on screen when an AV receiver function is  adjusted   Even when    On    is selected  operation details may not be  output if the input source is connected to an HDMI IN     E Language   North American models    gt  English  Deutsch  Francais  Espa  ol  Italiano   Nederlands  Svenska   European  Australian  Asian and Taiwanese  models      English  Deutsch  Francais  Espa  ol  Italiano   Nederlands  Svenska  FX  This setting determines the language used for the on screen  menus     Bi Screen Saver    gt  3min  5min  10min      Off  With this setting  y
255. the      LipSync    setting is set to    On    or not   gt  page 68    Note      A V Sync is disabled when the Pure Audio or Direct listening  mode is used with an analog input source     This setting cannot be used with the NET input selector     5       Name Edit    You can enter a custom name for each individual input  selector and radio preset for easy identification  When  entered  the custom name will appear on the display   The custom name is edited using the keyboard screen     E Name    1 Use A     lt   gt  to select a character  and then  press ENTER     Repeat this step to enter up to 10 characters     2 To store a name when you re done  be sure to  select            by using A V  4     and then press  ENTER     Name input area         4 4  Name Edit BD DVD  Name    a b c 4 e f g h i   k    m  n o    q r 8 t u vw x y z  1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0            I i       Space  Shift         BackSpace OK    All Erase       Space   Enters a space character   Shift 1   Toggles between lower and upper case characters        Left    gt   Right    Moves the cursor left or right in the Name input  area    Back Space 2   Moves the cursor backward and deletes one  character    OK   Confirms your entry   Tip    1 This can also be performed by using  10 on the remote   controller      2 Press CLR on the remote controller to delete all the  characters you have input     Tip     To name a radio preset  use TUNER to select AM or FM  and  then select the preset   gt  page 32       To resto
256. ti Zone   gt  page 47      1 To turn on Zone 2 3 and select an input source   press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 followed by an input  selector button within 8 seconds    Zone 2 3 turns on  the Z2 or Z3 indicator lights on the  AV receiver   s display    Tip    The Zone 2 trigger output goes high   12 V    To select the same source as the main room s  press  ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 twice     Zone 2 Selector   Source    or    Zone 3 Selector  Source    appears on the  AV receiver   s display    2 To turn off Zone 2 3  press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3  followed by OON STANDBY within 8 seconds   The zone is turned off    Tip      The Zone 2 trigger output goes low  0 volts      Bi Operating on the remote controller  To control Zone 2 3  you must press ZONE2 or ZONE3  on the remote controller first     RECEIVER  DISPLAY SOURCE                      INPUT  SELECTOR  ZONE2 MUTING  ZONE3 VOLA Y    TOP MENU    SPIGUIDE  PLAYLIST       A      71 V    Advanced Operations    1 Press ZONE2 or ZONES  then point the remote  controller at the AV receiver and press  ORECEIVER    Zone 2 3 turns on  the Z2 or Z3 indicator lights on the  AV receiver   s display    Tip    The Zone 2 trigger output goes high   12 V      2 To select an input source for Zone 2 3  press  ZONE2 or ZONES  followed by an INPUT  SELECTOR button     3 To turn off Zone 2 3  press ZONE2 or ZONES   followed by ORECEIVER   The zone is turned off     Tip    The Zone 2 trigger output goes low  0 volts      Adjusting the Volume for Zones  E Operating on the
257. tion is distinct  with emphasis on bass        Game Rock    Game Rock    In this mode  sound pressure is emphasized  to heighten live feel        Game Sports    Game Sports    In this mode  reverberation is increased and  sound localization decreased slightly        All Ch Stereo    All Ch Stereo    Ideal for background music  this mode fills  the entire listening area with stereo sound  from the front  surround  and surround back  speakers        Full Mono    Full Mono       In this mode  all speakers output the same  sound in mono  so the sound you hear is the  same regardless of where you are within the  listening room                  3 1  5 1  7 1     T D  Theater   Dimensional     T p       With this mode you can enjoy a virtual  surround sound even with only two or three  speakers  This works by controlling how  sounds reach the listener   s left and right ears   Good results may not be possible if there s  too much reverb  so we recommend that you  use this mode in an environment with little  or no natural reverb        Is    Bd    S  miel iz   m m        22       md            2 1  3 1  5 1    7 1                 En 40 Y       E Listening Modes    Turning On  amp  Basic Operations                                                                                                             Listening Mode Description Input Speaker  Source  Layout  Pure Audio     In this mode  the display and video circuitry             2 1  3 1  5 1   TA are timed off  minimizing possibl
258. tions are     gt  Save   Save the calculated settings and exit  Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker  Setup       Cancel   Cancel Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and  Speaker Setup        En 36 Y    Turning On 8 Basic Operations    Tip     You can view the calculated settings for the speaker  configuration  speaker distances  and speaker levels by  using  lt   gt      9 Use A F to select a target  and use 4 5   to change  the setting   After the results of Audyssey 2EQ have been saved   the menu will display the    Audyssey      gt  page 60       Dynamic EQ      gt  page 60      Dynamic Volume       gt  page 61  settings     Note      When    Audyssey Quick Start    has been used for  measurement     Audyssey    cannot be selected     These settings are applied to all input selectors     10 Press ENTER     11 Disconnect the speaker setup microphone     Note      You can cancel Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker  Setup at any point in this procedure simply by disconnecting the  setup microphone      Do notconnect or disconnect any speakers during Audyssey 2EQ  Room Correction and Speaker Setup      If the AV receiver is muted  it will be unmuted automatically  when Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup starts      Changes to the room after Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and  Speaker Setup requires you run Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction  and Speaker Setup again  as room EQ characteristics may have  changed     Error Messages    While Audyssey 2EQ   Room Correction a
259. tomaxx 10037  10714  10668  Newave 10178 Osio 10037  Luxor 11037  10208 11037  11324  12001 Nikkai 10037 Osume 10037  LXI 10178 Microspot 11614 Nikkei 10714 Otto Versand 10556  10037  10195   M Electronic 10037  10714  10634  Mikomi 11037  11585 Nikko 10178 _ 10512    10195  10512  11652 Tm TNT Nokia 10208 Pacific D 10714  11037                   Minerva isles    a2 Palladium 10556  10037  10714  Magnavox 10171  11454  11365  Ministry Of Sound  11667 Nordmende 10037  10714  10560       11506  11758  11867  Minok  10037 10195  11585  11667  Palsonic 10037  10698  12372 Mini 2 12001              10037  Magnum 10037  10714  10715                 Normerel 10037 Panasonic 11480  10037  10650   Manesth 10037 Mitsubishi ir a ee Nortek 10668 10508  10208  11636   Manhattan 10037  10668  11037 10512  11171   Nome 10037 _ 12170  Marantz 11454  10556  10037        TE Novita 11585 Panavision 10037  Mark 10037  10714  10715 Moms 10037 Nu Tec 10698 Panda 10698  10508  10208  Master s 10499 Morgan s 10037 O K Line 11037  11324 lea 11636     Penne 10178  Mairo 10698 Moserbaer 11585 Oceanic 10208 Perdi T 10037  Masuda 10037 MTC 10512 Odys 12719      x  A Perfekt 10037  Matsui 10556  10037  10714  MTlogic 10714 Okano 10037  10195  11037  10208  Petters 10037  11666  11667 Mudan 10208 OKI 11585  11667        Olevia 11610  12124 Philco 10178  10171  10037   Matsushita 10650 Multitec 10037  10668  11037    gt  11394  Maxent 11755 Multitech 10037 Ormi 10628 Philips 10178  10171  11454   Maxess 124
260. udyssey DSX first adds Wide channels  for the biggest impact on envelopment   Research in human hearing has proven that  information from the Wide channels is  much more critical in the presentation of a  realistic soundstage than Back Surround  channels found in traditional 7 1 systems   Audyssey DSX then creates a pair of  Height channels to reproduce the next most  important acoustical and perceptual cues   In addition to these new Wide and Height  channels  Audyssey DSX applies Surround  Envelopment Processing to enhance the  blend between the front and surround  channels            SI   m  0    H  x       7 1 FH  7 1 FW                En42 Y    Turning On  amp  Basic Operations                            Listening Mode Description Input Speaker Listening Mode Description Input Speaker  Source  Layout Source  Layout    Dolby Pro Logic II Movie   GE  7 1        THX Games 1   117 1   PLI Movie DSX Audyssey DSX 7 1 FW THX Games mode is meant for spatially    Dolby Pro Logic II Music   accurate playback of game audio  which is  PLI Music DSX Audyssey DSX often mixed similarly to movies but in a               Dolby Pro Logic    Game   smaller environment  THX Loudness Plus  PLI Game DSX Audyssey DSX is configured for game audio levels  with  The combination of Dolby Pro Logic II and Timbre Matching active   Audyssey DSX   modes can be used    Dolby Pro Logic          Movie   THX  EEE 51  The PLII and Audyssey DSX indicators Cinema  light on the AV receiver s display    Dolby P
261. ue to the electrical complexities of subwoofers and  the interaction with the room  THX recommends setting the level  and the distance of the subwoofer manually      Sometimes due to interaction with the room  you may notice  irregular results when setting the level and or distance of the main  speakers  If this happens  THX recommends setting them  manually     Using a Powered Subwoofer    If you re using a powered subwoofer and it outputs very  low frequency sound at a low volume level  it may not be  detected by Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker  Setup    If the  Subwoofer  appears on the  Review Speaker  Configuration  screen as    No     increase the subwoofer s  volume to the half way point  set it to its highest crossover  frequency  and then try running Audyssey 2EQ Room  Correction and Speaker Setup again  Note that if the  volume is set too high and the sound distorts  detection  issues may occur  so use an appropriate volume level  If the  subwoofer has a low pass filter switch  set it to Off or  Direct  Refer to your subwoofer s instruction manual for  details     A En37       Turning On  amp  Basic Operations    Using the Listening Modes    Selecting Listening Modes    See    About Listening Modes    for detailed information  about the listening modes     E Listening Mode Buttons    Press RECEIVER first     RECEIVER   DISPLAY SOURCE           REMOTE MODE INPUT SE               ro        D    TOP MENU    SPIGUIDE PREV CH  PLAYLIST PLAYLIST    RETURN        
262. unts you must first log out from the  current account  and log in again on the  Users  screen           Ent V    Using Last fm Internet Radio    Using Internet Radio    Using Last fm Internet Radio    Last fm is a music service that learns what you love     Your new Onkyo AV receiver is very clever  If you have a  free Last fm account  it will keep track of all the songs  you ve just played  When you visit the Last fm website   you can see personal charts of the music you   ve enjoyed   share them with friends and see what they like  too     With thousands of biographies  reviews and an endless  choice of personalised  ad free radio stations  Last fm is a  great way to discover music  Pick up your free Last fm  account today at www last fm join    UK and Germany only    Get a subscription and you can enjoy the best of ad free  Last fm Radio on your Onkyo AV receiver without a  computer    Recommended Radio    Discover smart personalised recommendations that adapt  as your tastes change    Artist Radio    Pick any artist and we   ll play you a whole station of music  inspired by your choice    My Library    Sit back and enjoy selections from all the music you    ve  heard since you joined Last fm    Tag Radio    Polish funk  Death pop  Think of a style and we ll  entertain you with it for hours     Start your free trial straight away when you create your  account and see for yourself what it s like to have the  world s music at your fingertips  Latest prices and full  informat
263. usique que vous avez  appr  ci  e  les partagez avec vos amis et   galement voir ce  qu ils aiment     Avec des milliers de biographies  de revues et un choix  infini de stations de radio personnalis  es et sans pub   Last fm est excellent moyen de d  couvrir de la musique   Cr  ez aujourd hui votre compte Last fm gratuit sur  www last fm join    Inscrivez vous et vous pourrez appr  cier le meilleur de la  radio sans pub Last fm sur votre ampli tuner AV Onkyo  sans ordinateur     Recommended Radio     D  couvrez les recommandations personnalis  es fut  es qui  changent en m  me temps que vos go  ts    Artist Radio     S  lectionnez n importe quel artiste et nous vous jouerons  une station enti  re de musique inspir  e par votre choix   My Library     Reposez vous de retour et appr  ciez les s  lections    partir  de toute la musique que vous avez entendue depuis que  vous avez joint Last fm    Tag Radio     Funk polonaise   Death pop   Pensez    un style et nous  vous divertirons avec pendant des heures     Commencez votre essai gratuit imm  diatement    la  cr  ation votre compte et d  couvrez par vous m  me ce que  cela fait d   avoir la musique du monde au bouts des doigts   Les derniers prix et les informations compl  tes sont  disponibles sur www last fm subscribe    1 Utilisez A Y pour s  lectionner    Sign in to your  account     puis appuyez sur ENTER   Vous poss  dez d  j   un compte Last fm  vous pouvez  vous y connecter pour s  lectionner    Sign in to your  accoun
264. utlet on a circuit different  from that to which the receiver is connected      Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician  for help     For Canadian Models    NOTE  THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS  COMPLIES WITH CANADIAN ICES 003    For models having a power cord with a polarized plug   CAUTION  TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK   MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT   FULLY INSERT     Mod  le pour les Canadien    REMARQUE  CET APPAREIL NUMERIQUE DE LA  CLASSE B EST CONFORME A LA NORME NMB 003  DU CANADA    Sur les mod  les dont la fiche est polaris  e     ATTENTION  POUR EVITER LES CHOCS  ELECTRIQUES  INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS  LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE  CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER  JUSQU    AU FOND     For British models    Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power  supply cord of this unit should be performed only by  qualified service personnel     IMPORTANT    The wires in the mains lead are coloured in accordance  with the following code   Blue  Neutral   Brown  Live  As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this  apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings  identifying the terminals in your plug  proceed as follows   The wire which is coloured blue must be connected to the  terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured  black   The wire which is coloured brown must be connected to  the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured  red     IMPORTANT    The plug is fitted with an appropriate fuse  I
265. xson 10178  10037 ER nr Teac 10178  10171                      15                y    ley    Remote Control Codes                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    TV VCR Combination DVD DVD DVD  Technics 10556 Dantax 30539  30713 Harman Kardon 30582  31229  33228 Maxim 30713  Thomson 10625 Denon 30490  30634  31634  Henss 30713 MDS 30713  32258  32748 Hitachi 30573  30713  31664 Medion 30630  30741  DVD Dick Smith 31152 Hoeher 30713 Memorex 32213  3D LAB 30539 Electronics HotMedia 31152 Metz 30571  30713  Accurian 30675 Digihome        Humax 30646 Micromedia 30503  30539  Acoustic Solutions 30713 DigiLogig 3013 Inno Hit 30713 Micromega 30539  AEG 30675 Digix Media    Insignia 30741  30675  32428  Microsoft 30522  32083  AFK 31152 Disney 30675 32596 Minax 30713  Aiwa 30533 DSE 30675  31152 Integra 30503  30571  30627  Mitsubishi 30713  Akai 30675 Dual 30713 31612  31634  32147 Momitsu 33052  Alba 30539  30713 Durabrand 30675  30713 Trradio 30646 NAD 30741  ani D            nc LI E sss  Amstrad 30713          a 32855 Onkyo 30503  30627  31612   Anthem 32820 cBonch 31152 ET a 32147  30571  31634  Aristona 30539  30646        30713        TES Oppo 30575  32545  Elite 31152    ASDA 32213 Kenwood 
266. y be interrupted  Try closing   any unused programs  use a more powerful computer    or use a dedicated server    If the server is serving large music files to several      networked devices simultaneously  the network may  become overloaded and playback may be interrupted   Reduce the number of playback devices on the   network  upgrade your network  or use a switch   instead of a hub        Can t connect to the AV receiver from a Web    browser       If you re using DHCP  your router may not always 68  allocate the same IP address to the AV receiver  so if   you find that you can t connect to a server or Internet  radio station  recheck the AV receiver s IP address on   the  Network  screen     Check the  Network  settings  68    USB Device Playback    Bi Can t access the music files on a USB device       Make sure the USB device is plugged in properly         The AV receiver supports USB devices that support 97  the USB mass storage device class  However    playback may not be possible with some USB devices  even if they conform to the USB mass storage device  class     USB memory devices with security functions cannot      be played     E Standby power consumption       67  69    In the following cases  the power consumption in  standby mode may reach up to a maximum of  12 0 W      The    HDMI Control RIHD     setting is set to     On      Depending on the TV status  the AV  receiver will enter standby mode as usual         The    HDMI Through  setting is set to other th
267. y leave marks on the  case      This unit s top and rear panels may get warm after  prolonged use  This is normal       f you do not use this unit for a long time  it may not  work properly the next time you turn it on  so be sure  to use it occasionally                   Safety Information and Introduction    For U S  models    FCC Information for User   CAUTION    The user changes or modifications not expressly approved  by the party responsible for compliance could void the  user s authority to operate the equipment     NOTE    This equipment has been tested and found to comply with   the limits for a Class B digital device  pursuant to Part 15   of the FCC Rules  These limits are designed to provide   reasonable protection against harmful interference in a   residential installation    This equipment generates  uses and can radiate radio   frequency energy and  if not installed and used in   accordance with the instructions  may cause harmful   interference to radio communications  However  there is no   guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular   installation  If this equipment does cause harmful   interference to radio or television reception  which can be   determined by turning the equipment off and on  the user is   encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more   of the following measures      Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna       ncrease the separation between the equipment and  receiver      Connect the equipment into an o
268. y of the  the AV receiver  While holding down STB DVR  press source is poor  upconversion may make the picture worse  OON STANDBY until    Deep Color Off    appears on or disappear altogether    the AV receiver   s display  Then  release both buttons  In this case  try the following    To reactivate the DeepColor function  repeat the above   process until    Deep Color On    appears on the AV 1 If the video source is connected to a component  receiver   s display and release the buttons  video input  connect your TV to COMPONENT    VIDEO MONITOR OUT     The AV receiver contains a microcomputer for signal If the video source is connected to a composite video  processing and control functions  In very rare situations  input  connect your TV to MONITOR OUT V   severe interference  noise from an external source  or 2 On the main menu  select    Input Output Assign      static electricity may cause it to lockup  In the unlikely and then select     Component Video Input      event that this happens  unplug the power cord from the   gt  page 54     wall outlet  wait at least five seconds  and then plug it       If the video source is connected to COMPONENT  back in     VIDEO IN  select the relevant input selector  and  assign it to  INT      If the video source is connected to COMPONENT  VIDEO IN 2  select the relevant input selector  and  assign it to    IN2        Onkyo is not responsible for damages  such as CD rental  fees  due to unsuccessful recordings caused by the unit s  ma
269. your music collection on your home stereo in  complete digital fidelity without a personal computer plus  safely backup all your songs  Here   s how     Creating an Account on your Computer    N QN      From your computer  open a web browser and go  to  www mp3tunes com signup    Create an account     Click the Upload link  www mp3tunes com upload   to add files to your Locker     View  edit and listen to your files by clicking on  Player  www mp3tunes com player      Playing Contents on the AV Receiver    Tip      Before proceeding  you need to select the MP3tunes service as    described in    Common Procedures in Internet Radio Menu       gt  page 1      1  2    Use A F to select    Sign in to your account     and  then press ENTER     Enter the e mail address and password you used  when creating your account  select    OK    and press  ENTER     The keyboard screen appears  You can enter your user  name and password from the remote controller or the  buttons on the AV receiver     If there are no mistakes in the information you have   entered  select    OK    and press ENTER    An account information confirmation screen appears   Tip     If you want to use multiple user accounts  see    Using    Multiple Accounts    gt  page 1   Login can be made from  the  Users  screen     Use A F to select the menu  then press ENTER   Music    The place to find your Artists  Albums  and Playlists   Shuffle     Starts playing a random selection of tracks from your  Locker    Search    Fi
270. yssey indicator will light     Note      When  Audyssey Quick Start    has been used for measurement      Audyssey    cannot be selected     Audyssey equalizing does not work with DSD sources     A Enso Y    Advanced Operations    B Dynamic EQ   gt  Off   gt On   Audyssey Dynamic EQ   becomes active   The Dynamic EQ indicator will light   With Audyssey Dynamic EQ  you can enjoy great sound  even when listening at low volume levels   Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of deteriorating  sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into  account human perception and room acoustics  It does so  by selecting the correct frequency response and surround  volume levels moment by moment so that the content  sounds the way it was created at any volume level     not  just at reference level     E Reference Level  Audyssey Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset   gt  OdB   This should be selected for movie contents    gt  SdB   Select this setting for content that has a very wide  dynamic range  such as classical music    gt  10dB   Select this setting for jazz or other music that has a  wider dynamic range  This setting should also be  selected for TV content as that is usually mixed at  10 dB below film reference    gt  15dB   Select this setting for pop rock music or other  program material that is mixed at very high listening  levels and has a compressed dynamic range     O To be continued    5       Movies are mixed in rooms calibrated for film reference   To achieve the same refer
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
manual EDC-400 2013.cdr  Cajun Injector®  Mode d`emploi détecteur de mouvement PD9 S 360 LC    U-7751 - Union Glashütte  MANUAL FXD 6465-6495 cs  Manuel d`utilisation/installation  Antec PC Noise Killer Kit  Chute libre    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file